Home

MELSEC-Q Current Transformer Input Module User`s Manual

1. Measured target Measured target lt lt Existing system 18 Signal converters are not required Secondary current CT Primary current lt lt System with a CT input module gt gt CT input module Measured target Measured target CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION This chapter describes the system configuration of the CT input module 2 1 Applicable Systems This section describes applicable systems 1 Applicable CPU modules and base units and number of mountable modules a When mounted with a CPU module The following table lists CPU modules and base units applicable to the CT input module and the number of mountable CT input modules Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply capacity may be insufficient Select the power supply capacity according to the module to be used If the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Applicable CPU module Applicable base unit Number of Extension base CPU type CPU model modules Main base unit cap Q00JCPU Up to 16 Basic model QCPU QOOCPU O O Q01CPU er Q02CPU Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Up to 64 O O Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q02PHCPU QO6PHCPU Process CPU BIXSHOHD Up to 64 O O Q25PHCPU Programmable Q12PRHCPU controll
2. Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by System area Z The status on instruction completion is stored O 1 Completion status 0 normal completion System Other than 0 error completion error code S42 System area 3 System area 5 4 CH1 Factory default setting offset value System S45 CH1 Factory default setting gain value System 6 CH2 Factory default setting offset value System S47 CH2 Factory default setting gain value System 5 8 CH3 Factory default setting offset value System 9 CH3 Factory default setting gain value System S 10 CHA Factory default setting offset value System 941 CHA Factory default setting gain value System 9 12 CH5 Factory default setting offset value System 13 CH5 Factory default setting gain value System 5 14 CH6 Factory default setting offset value System 5 15 CH6 Factory default setting gain value System S16 CH7 Factory default setting offset value System S 17 CH7 Factory default setting gain value System S 18 CH8 Factory default setting offset value System S 19 CH8 Factory default setting gain value System 5 20 CH1 User range setting offset value System 21 CH1 User range setting gain value System 5 22 CH2 User range setting offset value System 23 CH2 User range setting gain valu
3. Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device C Device Name x Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 HEX Address o z bec Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Address FE DIC B a 918 716154 3 2 110 E sj o o0000000 255 5 1 0000000000000000 0 Innnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 6 7 204 Click the button to leave the Online Module Change mode Click the Monitor window button to close the System Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window O Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to check if the channel to be used is set to Enable 0 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the digital conversion is performed properly Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING 7 3 Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Error flag XF is off CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 5 Resuming operation Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change Operation 4 Target Module OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Module Change 000 7 Execution 1O Address D Click the Installation esee React window to resume cont
4. Address Address Default Read Write Set value decimal hexadecimal namg value 2 xd eie 59 3By CH6 Scaling value 0 60 3Cy CH7 Scaling value 0 61 3Dy CH8 Scaling value 0 62 3Ey CH1 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W Q 63 3Fuy CH1 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 64 404 CH2 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 65 41H CH2 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 66 424 CH3 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 67 434 CH3 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 68 444 CH4 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 69 454 CH4 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 70 464 CH5 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 71 4TH CH5 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 72 484 CH6 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 73 494 CH6 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 74 4AH CH7 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 75 4By CH7 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 76 4Cy CH8 Scaling lower limit value 0 R W O 77 4Du CH8 Scaling upper limit value 0 R W O 78 4Ey to to System area 9 85 554 E 86 564 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 2 87 57H CH1 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O z 88 584 CH1 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O z 89 594 CH1 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O E 90 5SAy CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 91 5By CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 3 92 5Cu CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 3 93 5Dy CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O
5. M11 SET M13 M13 E Dedicated instruction LGP OGSTOR UO D100 M30 4 GP OGSTOR M30 M31 M RST M13 M30 mai Processing when an instruction execution I is failed END 250 Appendix 2 When Using GX Developer This chapter describes the operating procedure of GX Developer 1 Applicable software packages For the applicable software version refer to the following s Page 22 Section 2 1 4 Appendix 2 1 Operation of GX Developer Configure the following settings when using GX Developer APPENDICES Window name Application Reference I O assignment Set the type of the module to be mounted and the I O signal range Page 251 Appendix 2 1 1 Switch setting Configure the switch setting of an intelligent function module Page 252 Appendix 2 1 2 Configure the setting when using a user range setting for the input Offset gain setting range Page 153 Section 8 5 2 1 I O assignment Configure the setting on I O assignment in PLC parameter Parameter gt PLC parameter gt I O assignment Q parameter setting PLC name PLC system PLC file PLC RAS PLC RAS 2 Device Program Boot file SFC 140 assignment Buitin Ethernet port 120 Assignment Eu us ec E ee E Switch setting TT ME Bpoints er Detailed setting fra EE B E Assigning the D address is not necessary as the CPU does it automatically Leaving this s
6. 7 In CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 select any of the following Setting value Description Disable 0 Select this not to set the condition to stop logging Logging can be stopped at any time The logging stops when Trigger data lt Trigger setting value changes to Trigger data gt Trigger setting value Trigger data Example When the trigger setting value is 70 Trigger data Trigger Above 1 occurrence Trigger a setting value G 69 70 71 Trigger occurs 72 at this point 74 Time ud The logging stops when Trigger data gt Trigger setting value changes to Trigger data lt Trigger setting value Trigger data Example When the trigger setting value is 70 s Trigger data Below 2 Select this to set the 74 condition to stop logging Tiger 7 NY Z When a value in the buffer setting value Trigger 70 occurrence i memory areas become the x E Done set condition the logging gt N stops Time E 5 The logging stops when the trigger data passes the trigger setting value Either of the e following 1 or 2 a 7 H H H H a 1 When Trigger data lt Trigger setting value changes to Trigger data gt Trigger setting 5 value zi 2 When Trigger data gt Trigger setting value changes to Trigger data lt Trigger setting valu
7. llli 254 Appendix 3 3 Online module change operations lille 255 Appendix 3 4 Online module change procedure l l 256 Appendix 3 5 When a factory default range is used and initial settings are configured using a Sequence program 6 vaar vnr vnr vnr rn eee eee 257 Appendix 3 6 When a user range is used and initial settings are configured using a sequence program with another system 000000 e cece eee eae 263 Appendix 3 7 When a user range is used and initial settings are configured using a sequence program without another system llle 269 Appendix 4 External Dimensions 000000 0 ccc tte eee 275 10 INDEX 276 REVISION Sina 2 Aye ee re 278 WARRANTY sesia cee eee ka ere bee Ped de dau esaia ra Ras ded i bae dud 279 11 MANUAL PAGE ORGANIZATION In this manual pages are organized and the symbols are used as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation CHAPTER 7 VARIOUS SETTINGS is used for window Sa names and items 1 shows operating procedures XO shows mouse iaiog box operations recon Parameen The chapter of f the current page is shown 2 Select the I O Assignment tab is used for items in the menu bar and the project window ENERSEN Primer ro Item Description Tan Saka tre type of
8. MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV L MOV LMOV SET HO HO HO HOF8 K50 K100 H420 HO HOFE HOFBFD K1000 K1500 K6000 K7000 K50 K3 K1 HOFE K1000 K7000 SET X0 Y9 X9 RST it MEL ner M100 UO G150 UO G151 UO G152 UO GO UO G2 UO G3 UO G24 UO G26 UO G47 UO G48 UO G90 UO G91 UO G92 UO G93 UO G120 UO G130 UO G131 UO G300 UO G318 UO G326 Y9 M100 Y9 Lad CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Turn on Module READY check flag Set CH1 Input range setting Set CH2 Input range setting Set CH3 Input range setting Enable CH1 to CH3 Digital conversion CH2 Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings CH3 Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Set CH1 to CH3 averaging process setting Set conversion speed Activate CH1 Input signal error detection Set CH2 and CH3 Warning output Set CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value Set CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value Set CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value Set CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value Set CH3 Rate alarm warning detection period Set CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value Set CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value Set CH1 Peak current detection setting Set CH1 Peak current detecti
9. 3 Functions This instruction reads out the offset gain set values in a user range setting of the CT input module to the CPU module The interlock signal of G P OGLOAD includes a completion device and a completion status indication device O 1 a Completion device The device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on or off depending on the status of the G P OGLOAD instruction completion Normal completion the device remains off Error completion the device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGLOAD instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing END END END END processing X processing processing processing Sequence program jumm ene Execution completion of ON the G P OGLOAD instruction G P OGLOAD OFF OFF o instruction i ON Completion device D OE 1 DEE LON Execution fied Completion status OFF 1 OFF Execution succeeded wy indication device D 1 i 1 scan 4 Errors The instruction has no errors 245 avO190 d 5 z xpueddy uononjsu pejeoipeg xipueddy 5 Program example The following shows the sequence program of the CT input module installed in I O number X Y00 to X YOF with the following conditions Turning on M11 reads
10. CT input module J CT I Measured target 1 cT Measured target 2 gt 8 points 8 channels CT Measured target 8 A CT input range can be selected for each channel 2 Reliability by high accuracy A CT input module can achieve the high accuracy of 0 5 when the ambient temperature is 25 5 C and 1 0 when the ambient temperature is 0 to 55 C at the maximum digital output value 3 Operation of a digital output value by the scaling function The scaling function can represent a digital output value in an easily understandable value depending on a purpose 4 Monitoring of a measured target By using the input signal error detection function warning output function or dropout function the status of a measured target can be monitored easily 5 Detection of the peak current By setting the peak current detection value and peak current detection time the peak current occurred excessively at a system start up or an overload of devices can be detected Doing so improves maintainability of devices and the failure diagnosis for a measured target Peak current detection time Peak current detection value i aN Current values from a CT gt Time U So Alarm ON The number of peak current detection is recorded in a non volatile memory Therefore the number of peak
11. Store the setting data of the ag M MOV Ko Di dedicated instruction G OFFGAN 35 in D1 38 G OFFGAN UO D1 J Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN E 2 XOA h Processing in normal mode s END 1 Set one of the following values input range according to the specifications of the CT to be connected 0 to 5AAC 00104 e 0 to 50AAC 00114 0 to 100AAC 00124 0 to 200AAC 00134 0 to 400AAC 001441 0 to 600AAC 00154 Point The program enclosed by the dotted line is the common programs among the following three programs Switching the mode using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Switching the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and using Operating condition setting request Y9 Switching the mode using the intelligent function module switch setting 155 156 c Switching the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and using Operating condition setting request Y9 M5 UO0 tt MOV H4144 G158 UO MOV H964 G159 SET Y9 Y9 x9 M RST Y9 Common program M5 UO M MOV H964 G158 UO MOV H4144 G159 SET Y9 Y9 X9 a A RST Y9 X0A A Processing in normal mode END Set 4144H to Mode switching setting 1 Un G158 Set 0964H to Mode switching setting 2 Un G159 Turn on Operating condition setting request Y9 Turn off Operating
12. 220 1 Create a new project XO Project gt New 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC Type and click the button 3 Open the Transfer Setup window OD Navigation window gt Connection Destination view gt Connection destination data name 4 Configure the settings to access the module on the remote I O station and click the button CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE From the previous page 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Devico window C Device Name x uoc CANNES d zie XO Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Ba tch Address F E p c B a s 8 7 e 5 4 3 2 1 0 ifotototolotofatorerorororoforore E 6 Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Y Disable 1 for all channels Device Label Buffer Memory 8 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Device Label Y9 va Data Type Bit ow Switch ON OFF Settable Range 9 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped with Conversion completed flag Un G10 Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delet
13. Status pe Module Selection Completed Module Control Restart m Status Guidance Please turn off signal of the changed module hen you change the intelligent Function module lease press next button when you are ready cms 4 When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation described in gt Page 196 Section 10 6 3 MELSOFT Application i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block 6 Remove the module Point Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit weJ6olg eouenbes e Bulsn 185 eJy sjejeureijeg pue pasn s ebuey jnejeqg AJojoe4 e ueuw 9 0L 195 3 Mounting a new module Mount a new module in the same slot and install the Online Module Change terminal block After mounting the module click the Execute button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off 4 Checking operation 1 To check the operation click the button to cancel the control start Online Module Change EE MELSOFT Application x 2 Click the button to leave the Online A Module Change mode 4 To the next page 196 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE M
14. 10 Since the new module is in the default status initial settings must be configured using a sequence program after the control resumed Before the initial setting check if the initial setting program is proper satisfying the following Normal system configuration The sequence program should set the initial setting on the leading edge of Module READY X0 of the CT input module uejs s Jayujoue INOYHM wei6oid eouenbes e Buisn peunBijuoo eje sBumes jeu pue pesn si eBuei Jasn e ueuM 7 e xipueddy Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after RUN In this case the initial setting is not set When used on remote I O network Insert a user device where the initial setting will be set at any timing initial setting request signal into the sequence program 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy euuo e xipueddy Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network In this case the initial setting is not set 273 5 Resuming operation 1 Open the Online module change window again 2 Click the Execution button on the appeared window to resume control Module READY X0 Online module change turns on 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT series GX Developer E3 e 274 APPENDICES Appendix 4 External Dimensions The following figure shows the e
15. Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring pe i window C Device Name M Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 HEX Address o x oec gt D Online o gt Monitor E Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Bat ch Address FIEID cIB 49 68 716151413 2110 S RDEBBEBEBORBEBEE x 5 Monitor Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to check if the channel to be used is set to Enable 0 6 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the digital conversion is performed properly 7 Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Error flag XF is off uonoun uoneunBiuo eu Buls JEG Sly sjejeurejeg pue pas s eBues nezog Asojoe4 e ueuM FOL 191 5 Resuming operation 1 Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change D Diagnostics gt Online Module Change 2 Click the Be button on the appeared window to resume control Module READY X0 turns on 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application d 192 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 6 Whena Factory Default Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using a Sequence Program 1 Stopping operation 1
16. GX Works2 GX Developer controllers Product name of the software package for the MELSEC programmable Programming tool CT input value Generic term for GX Works2 and GX Developer primary current value as a CT input value An alternating current value measured using a CT This manual describes a Factory default range A generic term for factory default input ranges 0 to 5AAC 0 to 50AAC 0 to 100AAC 0 to 200AAC 0 to 400AAC and 0 to 600AAC User range A generic term for user defined input ranges 0 to 5AAC 0 to 50AAC 0 to 100AAC 0 to 200AAC 0 to 400AAC and 0 to 600AAC Buffer memory values and monitored values for communication with a CPU module The memory of an intelligent function module used to store data such as setting PACKING LIST The product package contains the following Model Product Quantity Q68CT Q68CT current transformer input modul e 1 Before Using the Product BCN P5901 1 15 CHAPTER 1 overview A CT means Current Transformer and is a current sensor which is necessary to measure an alternating current A CT is used for the following purposes widely To control a load or monitor an operation of equipment and devices To control or monitor of an electric power system When a high current is measured in an electric power receiving facility measurement devices cannot be wired directly A CT is used for such a sit
17. MOV W1003 D13 SM400 i i MOV W1009 K2M70 M70 Ih Processing when a peak current is detected SM400 MOV W1006 K4M10 MOV W1007 K4M30 M12 tt Processing when an alert occurs M13 th Processing when an alert occurs M34 P a aaa Processing when an alert occurs M35 ht Processing when an alert occurs SM400 MOV W1008 K2M50 Mae Processing when an input signal error is detected X23 X100C er voor X100F i BCD W1010 K4Y30 X24 tt SET Y100F Y100F X100C X100F AF Yt RST Y100F TEND j Read Conversion completed flag Read CH1 Digital output value Read CH2 Digital output value I Read CH3 Digital output value I Read Peak current detection flag Processing when a peak current is detected for CH1 Peak current detection Read Warning output flag Process alarm Read Warning output flag Rate alarm Processing when an alert occurs for CH2 Process alarm upper limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH2 Process alarm lower limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value _ Read Input signal error detection 1 flag Processing when CH1 Input signal error Turn on input signal error reset signal Output the error code in BCD 1 Turn on Error clear request Turn off Error clear request CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 9 3 2 Program example when not using parameters of the int
18. Online gt Write to PLC Select Online on the menu bar and then select Write to PLC Navigation Project A window selected in the view selection area is displayed EMEN Parameter D Project window gt Parameter Intelligent Function Module G PLC Parameter Select Project from the view selection area to open the Project window In the Project window expand Parameter and select PLC Parameter Global Device Comment Program Setting 8 POU Qj Program pe MAIN B Local Device Comment E Device Memory Device Initial Value tile Connection Destination Destination View selection area Unlabeled 12 Pages describing instructions are organized as shown below The following illustration is for explanation purpose only and should not be referred to as an actual documentation Instruction name CHAPTER 6 SOCKET COMMUNICATION FUNCTION 6 4 2 Disconnecting a connection SP SOCCLOSE Execution condition of the instruction SPSoccLosgl f E feroce 8 Structure of the instruction in the ladder mode Internal device JDO Consta O shows the devices ere e n l eee applicable to the instruction 5 fo o o e A A 1 File registers set for each local device or program cannot be used Descriptions of Setting side setting data andidata type 1 Setting da User Device value is
19. User range 0 to SOAAC 00114 9t range of 0010 to 00154 User range 0 to 100AAC 0012p The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 User range 0 to 200AAC 00134 User range 0 to 400AAC 00144 User range 0 to 600AAC 0015p The settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 are invalid The channel where the error has occurred fits in O A value fits in A indicates that the alarm status is as follows Correct the settings in CH1 Process alarm lower lower 640 2 Process alarm lower lower limit value gt Process alarm lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value upper limit value Un G117 3 Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value 4 Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm upper upper limit value CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Set CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G125 is outside the range of 10 to 5000ms Un G118 to Un G125 to within 10 to 5000ms 4 CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Set CHLI Rate alarm warning detection period we Un G125 is less than conversion cycle of CHOI digital output Un G118 to Un G125 to a value equal to or value ms multiple of conversion cycle of CHO digital output The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 value ms The values set in CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62
20. a Displaying product number For the CT input module is displayed since the product number display is not supported Point The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool may differ from that on the rating plate and on the front part of the module The serial number on the rating plate and front part of the module indicates the management information of the product The serial number displayed on the product information list of a programming tool indicates the function information of the product The function information of the product is updated when a new function is added 25 JequinN ElJ9S pue uois19A UONDUN4 94 YOSUD oi MOH ZZ CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter describes general specifications performance specifications I O conversion characteristics accuracy and functions 3 1 General Specifications For the general specifications of the CT input module refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 26 3 2 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Performance Specifications This section describes the performance specifications of the CT input module 3 2 1 Performance specifications list The following table lists the performance specifications of the CT input module Item Specifications Number of input points Operation method 8 points 8 channels Effective value operation 0 to SAAC 0 to 50A
21. button to cancel the control start MELSOFT series GX Developer Ed Click the Ex button to leave the Online module change mode close the System Monitor window 1 0 Address 0 10 20 i To the next page 272 APPENDICES From the previous page 4 4 In Device test set the prerecorded data to the Device test Bit device buffer memory Device Close E zl pe Online gt Debug gt Device test Hide history 5 FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Turn User range write request YA from off to on to restore the user settings to the module Word device buffer memory Pies I 6 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un1G0 to G Butter memory Module start VO 6000 Hen Enable 0 for the channel used Address 00 v HEX v 7 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Setting value Y9 pec geli 165 vegen xi pa 8 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 Program i to check if the digital conversion is performed abel reference program 7 properly Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF Em Force ON 3 Dnm fed Force OFF 0 Fnrce NN 9 Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING 37 Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off f Error flag XF is off
22. c2 cua CH4 cus cH amp cuz cH amp Please select a target channel for the offset gain setting and press Offset Setting or Gain Setting Pressing Close registers to the module Input Range Setting Enable to change the input range setting for each channel Input Range chi Input Range CH1 Not to Change v CH2 p CH3 Caution Information will be directly written to Input Range Setting area of buffer memory Data will have some differences because the information is not reflected to Intelligent Function Module Parameters x Coa CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS Select a user range according to the type of the CT to be connected and click the button To use the input range set at the beginning of Offset Gain Setting select Not to Change and click the button Input the offset value current to the target channel terminals and click the button Check that Offset Status changed to Changed and click the button Select Not to Change and click the button 1 When setting a gain only set an input range according to the Step 4 151 ZS310M XH Jo Bumes ureoesyo WOI Bunes L 9 8 Bumes uieBjesyoO 98 Input the gain value current to the target channel terminals and click the ves button MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Check that Gain Status changed to Changed and click the Ecm button Offset Gain Setting CE
23. module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING _ gt Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Error flag XF is off 13 Since the new module is in the default status initial settings must be configured using a sequence program after the control resumed Before the initial setting check if the initial setting program is proper satisfying the following Insert a user device where the initial setting will be set at any timing initial setting request signal into the sequence program Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network In this case the initial setting is not set 225 uejs g Jeaujouy jnoyym ure460Jg eouenbes e Husn 19S eJy sjejeueJeg pue pasn s eBuey Jes e ueuM OL OL 5 Resuming operation 1 Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change D Diagnostics gt Online Module Change 2 Click the Be button on the appeared window to resume control Module READY X0 turns on 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application d 226 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 11 Range Reference Table This section lists range reference used for an online module change 1 CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value U
24. Online gt Debug gt Device test 2 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Hide history Disable 1 for all channels Word device buffer memory 3 Turnonthen off Operating condition setting request C Device Y9 i G Butter memory Module startl 0 0000 v Hex 4 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped Address 0000 HEX with Conversion completed flag Un G10 Setting value OOFF HEX v 16 bit integer z se Program Label reference program Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF EZN Force ON Force OFF Jet Clear DOFF 5 If the buffer memory data are not recorded yet follow the procedures 6 and 7 6 Compare the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un G233 with the values in Range Reference Table gt Page 227 Section 10 11 7 Ifthe values are proper save the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un1G233 Point Ifthe buffer memory values are improper compared to the reference table the offset gain values cannot be saved and restored Before resuming the control configure an offset gain setting according to the flowchart 3 Page 153 Section 8 5 2 Note that if module control is resumed without offset gain setting being made operation will be performed with
25. The online module change is complete MELSOFT series GX Developer x d 262 APPENDICES Appendix 3 6 When a user range is used and initial settings are configured using a sequence program with another system 1 Stopping operation 1 Open the Device test window Device test Bit device Disce Close XO Online gt Debug gt Device test 2 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Hide history FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toagle force Word device buffer memory Device Y9 Bulfer memory Module start 0 0000 v Hex 4 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped Address 0000 HEX with Conversion completed flag Un G10 Disable 1 for all channels 3 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Setting value for HEX v 16 bit integer z se Program Label reference program v Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF E Force ON Force OFF Jet Clear DOFF uajS S JEYJOUE UM Wwe1B01d eouenbes e Buisn peunBijuoo eje S6unes jeu pue pesn si ue Jasn e USYM 9 xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy uuo e xipueddy 263 2 Removing a module System Monitor Installed status Base Base Module MasterPLC gt Unmol ly 16 Q25PHCPU Parameter status p Mode 170 A
26. Un G1056 to UNIG 1063 is set to Above 1 Below 2 or Pass through 3 the set number of logging data are collected after the conditions of CHO Trigger data UNIG 1064 to Un G1071 and CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1089 are satisfied and the logging stops Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on the logging stops regardless of ON or OFF of the hold trigger All the logging data stored before Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on are cleared Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to UNIG 1023 turned ON 1 and set OFF 0 to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G 1015 If CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is set OFF 0 before hold the logging does not stop After CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is set ON 1 the following delay occurs at the maximum until the CT input module receives a hold trigger Trigger delay Logging cycle Cycle at which the logging is actually performed Scan time of CPU module Ex When CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 is set to Disable 0 and CH1 Digital output value Un G11 is logged CH1 Logging hold request OFF 0 X ON 1 Un G1008 Hold trigger is E executed The logging is held uonoun4 Bui6601 Zy v CH1 Logging data The data stored before the last Un G5000 to Un1G9999 5000 data are discarded 14 gt CH1 Logging points afte
27. Un G1106 to Un G1113 Values are initialized Initial value 0 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1121 CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 The values before the logging resumption are stored 1 After the logging resumed values are stored starting from the head area of the logging data storage area The values before the logging resumption are stored in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un1G44999 To refer to the logging data check the valid data with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1113 70 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 10 To check logging data without stopping logging Logging data can be checked during the logging When checking the logging data on a display device the data can be checked easily by monitoring the buffer memory without stopping logging on the display device To check the logging data adjust the logging cycle to prevent the logging data from being updated during read a Checking method Read the logging data monitoring the storage places of the latest data and the oldest data in the following buffer memory areas Buffer memory Description Reference Page 133 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Check where the oldest data is stored counting from the head Stine ection 6 Un G1097 address in the logging data storage area 43 Page 134 CHO Latest pointer Un1G1098 to Check where the latest data is stored counting from the head Sadiong i 3 Un G1105 address in the
28. Un G1124 O Us 135 136 48 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1185 The time that the hold trigger occurred is recorded for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 137 Page 60 Section 4 12 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1154 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1155 Month Day Un G1156 Hour Minute Un G1157 Second Day of the week Storage Item Storage contents 4 example First two digits of the year Last two digits of the 20114 year Month Day Stored in BCD code 3294 Hour Minute 1035 Second 404 One of the following values is stored for each day of the week in BCD code Sunday 00 Monday 01 Day of the week Tuesday 02 Wednesday 03 024 Thursday 04 Friday 05 Saturday 06 1 Those are values when a hold trigger is detected at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 Point Time units shorter than one second are not recorded When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1185 is cleared CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 49 Latest address of error history Un G1800 The start address of the latest error history is stored For details on the error history function refer to the following e Error History Function s Page 74 Section 4 15 50 Error history No O Un G1810 to Un G196
29. When flashing Check item Action Is there any input signal error Check Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Is there any peak current detection Check Peak current detection flag Un G301 11 3 4 When a digital output value cannot be read Check item Are the k terminal and I terminal wired properly s the secondary side of the CT short circuited Action Refer to the following and wire the k terminal and terminal properly e Wiring 37 Page 142 Section 7 4 Is a connection cable disconnected Confirm the faulty part by checking them visually or conducting electricity Is the CPU module in the STOP status Is the offset gain setting correct Change the status of the CPU module to RUN Check if the offset gain setting is correct When a user range is selected change the input range to a factory default range and check if digital conversion is performed If the digital conversion is performed properly configure the offset gain setting again Is the input range setting correct Is Conversion enable disable setting Un GO set to Disable 1 for the channel to be used Check CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 If the input range setting is incorrect start over the setting Check Conversion enable disable setting Un GO and enable the digital conversion in the sequence program or intelligent function module parameter Is Operating condition sett
30. a Turning on Input signal error detection signal XC Input signal error detection signal XC turns on when the CT input value exceeds the input range The CT input module results in the following states Converting or unused 0 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 in the corresponding channel For the error detected channel the digital output value just before the error detection is held in the buffer memory ALM LED flashes b Turning off Input signal error detection signal XC When the CT input value falls within the input range turn on then off Error clear request YF to turn off Input signal error detection signal XC The CT input module results in the following states ALM LED turns off Latest error code Un G19 is cleared Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program Input signal error detection fo UmG49 0 Normal e d Input signal error XX 0 Normal 1 P 1 1 ON 1 d I Input signal error detection T signal XC FF OFF EN OFF EY Error clear request YF Point When the CT input value falls within the input range the digital conversion resumes regardless of the status of Input signal error detection flag Un G49 and Input signal error detection signal XC After the first update of the digital output value Conversion completed 1 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 in the corresponding channe
31. gt New New Project Project Typer E p use Label QCPU Q mode OMEN O I B OWSY Sy uo NPON eu BuIsN ueuM 6 QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O Language ham 7 171 2 Add the Q68CT to the project on GX Works2 OD Project window Intelligent Function Module gt gt Right click gt New Module New Module Analog Module Q68CT 3 Display the Q68CT Switch Setting window and configure the setting as follows OD Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Q68CT gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0000 Q68CT 172 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 4 Display the Q68CT initial setting window and configure the setting as follows When creating a program without using parameters of an intelligent function module skip this procedure bow Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt gt Q68CT gt Parameter P 0000 068CT Parameter Display Filter Display All z CH1 CH2 Set the digital conversion system Conversion enable disable setting 0 Enable O Enable D Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable Di Di 1 Disable Averaging process setting 0 Sampling 2 Count Average 4 Primary Delay 0 Sampling 0 Sampling i i 0 Sampling CH3 CH4 CHS Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Sampling cycle setting Warning output function Process alarm warning output setting Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limi
32. signal Output the error code in BCD Turn on Error clear request Turn off Error clear request 163 S npouw uondun 1ueBi ejui 94 JO s1ejeurejed Buisn uSyM ajdwexe wesbolg L Z 6 uoneunBijuo WISJS S PJEPUEIS e Ul SINPON SY BuIsN ueuM Z6 9 2 2 164 Program example when not using parameters of the intelligent function module 1 Device for user Device Description D11 CH1 Digital output value D12 CH2 Digital output value D13 CH3 Digital output value MO CH1 Conversion completed flag M1 CH2 Conversion completed flag M2 CH3 Conversion completed flag M10 to M25 Warning output flag Process alarm M30 to M45 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 to M57 Input signal error detection flag M70 to M77 Peak current detection flag M100 Module READY check flag X0 Module READY X9 Operating condition setting completed flag XC Input signal error detection signal XE Conversion completed flag UE eee X YF XF Error flag Y9 Operating condition setting request YF Error clear request X10 Digital output value read command input signal X13 Input signal error detection reset signal QX10 X10 to X1F X14 Error reset signal Y20 to Y2F Error code display BCD 4 digits QY10 Y20 to Y2F 2 Program example X0 tt M100 Y9 x9 MOV MOV MOV LMOV MOV MOV MOV LMOV MOV MOV MOV MOV MOV
33. 00144 0 to 600AAC 0015 2 Turnon then off Operating condition setting request Y9 2 When using a user range Set 00104 to 00154 to CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 depending on the CT to be connected e Configure the offset gain setting For the offset gain setting refer to gt Page 150 Section 8 5 One offset value and one gain value are saved in the CT input value as the user range setting for each channel When connecting a new CT to a channel where a user range was set with a different CT before configure the offset gain setting again 36 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 3 Conversion Enable Disable Function Set whether to enable or disable the digital conversion for each channel 1 Setting procedure 1 Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 4 4 Sampling Cycle Switching Function A sampling cycle can be selected from one of the following 10ms 8CH 20ms 8CH 50ms 8CH 100ms 8CH 1 Setting procedure 1 Seta sampling cycle to Sampling cycle setting Un G26 Item Setting 10ms 8CH 0 20ms 8CH 1 50ms 8CH 2 100ms 8CH 3 Sampling cycle setting Un G26 2 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Point Digital conversion is performed in the set sampling cycle regardless of the number of conversion enabled channels uonouny ajqes
34. 1 is set to CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 the setting value is ignored 128 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY b Actual logging cycle The actual logging cycle is an integral multiple of the conversion cycle of digital output value or scaling value The conversion cycle of each conversion method is as follows Digital conversion Conversion cycle method Samplin n 9 Sampling cycle processing Time set to CHO Average time Average number of times Time average Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 x Sampling cycle Sampling cycle Times set in CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Count average Un G1 to Un G8 x Sampling cycle Moving average Sampling cycle Primary delay filter Sampling cycle 1 The value after the decimal point is rounded off If the set logging cycle is not an integral multiple of the conversion cycle the logging function operates in the maximum cycle of an integral multiple within the setting range Ex The processing time for the following settings is calculated below Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 Sampling processing 0 Sampling cycle setting Un G26 100ms 8CH 3 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 Digital output value 0 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 1950 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 ms
35. 1 R W O 1028 4044 CH5 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1029 4054 CH6 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1030 4064 CH7 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1031 4074 CH8 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1032 4084 CH1 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1033 4094 CH2 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1034 40Ay CH3 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1035 40By CH4 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1036 40Ch CH5 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1037 40Dh CH6 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1038 40E CH7 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1039 40Fy CH8 Logging cycle setting value 300 R W O 1040 4104 CH1 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1041 4114 CH2 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1042 4124 CH3 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1043 4134 CH4 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1044 4144 CH5 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1045 4154 CH6 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1046 4164 CH7 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1047 4174 CH8 Logging cycle unit setting 0 R W O 1048 4184 CH1 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1049 4194 CH2 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1050 41Ay CH3 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1051 41By CH4 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1052 41Ch CH5 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1053 41Dy CH6 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1054 41Ey CH7 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1055 41Fy CH8 Logging points after trigger 2500 R W O 1056 4204 CH1 Level trigger condition setting 0 R
36. 125 276 E CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 Un G102 Un G106 Un G110 UNIG114 varar 0 00 0 000 116 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 Un G99 Un G103 Un G107 Un G111 Un G115 2 2 ee eee 116 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 Un G104 Un G108 Un G112 Un G116 0 000000 116 CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 Un G105 Un G109 Un G113 Un G117 2 0 2 0 ee ee 116 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 Un G135 Un G137 Un G139 UNG141 2 see ees SE SE ga ee 118 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 Un G134 Un G136 Un G138 UMG140 viss aske E ERR aac Eve en 118 CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to UMG125 pa ea dada es ai rat i 117 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 Un G70 Un G72 Un G74 Un G76 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Un G71 Un G73 Un G75 Un G77 er dd LE Eid MM AE Tea Was 115 CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 114 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1071 131 CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1185 ter Mek cater a dre OE PLE 136 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1121 135 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1089 Do huet Mi EACH
37. 162 5 Program example X10 X0 XOE Y9 f H t MOV DO K2M0 MO E LMOV D1 D11 M1 MOV D2 D12 M2 LMOV D3 D13 SM400 MOV D9 K2M70 M70 Processing when a peak current is detected SM400 MOV D6 K4M10 MOV D7 K4M30 M12 Processing when an alert occurs M13 Processing when an alert occurs M34 Processing when an alert occurs M35 Processing when an alert occurs SM400 MOV D8 K2M50 M50 Processing when an input signal error is detected X13 XOC i SET YOF XOF BCD D10 K4Y20 X14 tk SET YOF YOF XOC XOF AR sr YOF END CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Read Conversion completed flag Read CH1 Digital output value Read CH2 Digital output value Read CH3 Digital output value Read Peak current detection flag Processing when a peak current is detected for CH1 Peak current detection Read Warning output flag Process alarm Read Warning output flag Rate alarm Processing when an alert occurs for CH2 Process alarm upper limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH2 Process alarm lower limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value Read Input signal error detection flag Processing when CH1 Input signal error Turn on input signal error reset
38. 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not available after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation of damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi loss in opportunity lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products replacement by the user maintenance of on site equipment start up test run and other tasks 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 279 Microsoft Windows Windows NT and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a trademark of Intel
39. 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE When Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is off the digital conversion processing is not executed Operating condition setting completed flag X9 turns off in the following status When Operating condition setting request Y9 is on Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program ON Module READY X0 p ON ON Operating condition setting OFF T E completed flag X9 EMEND r Fj ON Operating condition setting OFF i e request Y9 NON Conversion completed OFF E flag XE 7 Offset gain setting mode flag XA a Offset gain setting mode When registering the value which was adjusted with the offset gain setting to the module use Offset gain setting mode flag XA as an interlock condition to turn on then off User range write request YA For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain Setting 7 7 Page 150 Section 8 5 Controlled by the CT input module gt Controlled by the sequence program Module READY X0 OFF o o ON ON MS Offset gain setting mode F flag XA a OFF P o5 n ON T 4 p D ro User range write request YA OFF OFF D 3 o n b Normal mode At the user range setting restoration use Offset gain setting mode flag XA as an interlock condition to turn on then off User
40. 58N m Terminal block mounting screw M3 5 0 66 to 0 89N m 1 138 The module can be easily fixed onto the base unit using the hook at the top of the module However it is recommended to secure the module with the module fixing screw if the module is subject to significant vibration To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection into the hole in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect mounting may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction CHAPTER 7 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 7 2 Settings and the Procedure Before Operation Start Mounting the module Mount the CT input module in any desired configuration Wiring Connect a CT to the CT input module 037 Page 142 Section 7 4 NO Use user range settings Offset gain setting To use user range settings set the offset gain values gt Page 150 Section 8 5 Programming and debugging Create and check a sequence program uoneJedo eJ0Jeg eunpeooJg au pue SBunes 77 139 7 3 Part Names This section describes the part names of a CT input module 1 Part names The following
41. AGJQSTEL G Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QI72LP25 BR15 EA E Connection Channel List Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CCLink C24 NET 10 H System Image Phone Line Connection C24 OK CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting i To the next page uonoun uoneunBiuo 2y Husn JES eJy sjejeuredeg pue pas s eBues jnejeg Auojoe4 e ueuM SOL 187 From the previous page Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring zesuen 1 Cmm 1 0000000 nnnnnannnn 4 Modify Value Bit Bit Word Signed 188 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window XO Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Disable 1 for all channels Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped with Conversion completed flag Un G10 2 Removing a module System Monitor Connection Channel List p Monitor Status G M d Mode System Monitor Online Module Change Man
42. Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect el A Print Poeman system enor Hist Close Click the button to enable a module change Online Module Change Operation Target Module d Module Change I O Address 0000 Execution Module Name Q68CT Installation Confirmation Status reos Module Selection Completed Module Control Restart Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module pon you change the intelligent Function module lease press next button when you are ready Gs 4 When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation described in gt Page 216 Section 10 9 3 MELSOFT Application uejs g Jeaujouy ynouym uonoun UONEINBYUO ey Bursf 19S eJy SJSJSWEJEd pue p sn s eBuey esq e ueuM 6 0L i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block 6 Remove the module Point Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 215 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount anew module in the same slot and install the Online Module Change terminal block 2 Atter mounting the module click the Execute button and make sure that the R
43. Checking the error history The start address of the latest error history can be checked in Latest address of error history Un G1800 Ex 1 When the third error occurred The third error is stored in Error history No 3 and the value 1830 start address of error history No 3 is stored in Latest address of error history Un G1800 Latest address of error history The start address of the error history Un G1800 where the latest error is stored is stored Details of error history An error history consists of the following Address data 1810 Error history No 1 Error code First two digits Last two digits of the year of the year Month Day Error 4820 Hour Minute time Error history No 2 Second Day of the week eum x 1830 Error history No 3 me Empty 1960 Error history No 16 Empty uonounJ J0 SIH JOUIF GL Y 15 2 When the 17th error occurred The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the value 1810 start address of error history No 1 is stored in Latest address of error history Un G1800 Latest address of error history Un G1800 Address 1810 Error history No 1 17th error 1820 Error history No 2 The 17th error is stored in Error history No 1 and the 1st error history will be erased 2nd error 1830 Error history No 3 3
44. D1091 MOV K6000 D1092 f MOV K7000 D1093 MOV K50 D1120 MOV K3 D1130 MOV K1 D131 MOV HOFE D1300 MOV K1000 D1318 MOV K7000 01326 M102 X1009 Y1009 it i HA KO gt LKO _ ZP REMTO ur K1 K1 HO K150 D1150 K3 M200 M200 M201 zP REMTO ur K1 K1 HO KO D1000 K4 M202 M202 M203 4 f ZP REMTO ur K1 K1 HO K24 D1024 K3 M204 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Set CH1 Input range setting J Set CH2 Input range setting Set CH3 Input range setting Enable CH1 to CH3 Digital conversion CH2 Average time Average number of J times Moving average Time constant settings CH3 Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Set CH1 to CH3 averaging process setting Set conversion speed Activate CH1 Input signal error detection Set CH2 and CH3 Warning output Set CH2 Process alarm lower lower limit value Set CH2 Process alarm lower upper limit value Set CH2 Process alarm upper lower limit value Set CH2 Process alarm upper upper limit value Set CH3 Rate alarm warning detection period Set CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value Set CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value Set CH1 Peak current detection setting Set CH1 Peak current detection time Set CH1 Peak current detection value Write to the buffer memory 179 e npoui uonoun zus ia eui JO sJejeujeued Husn jou USYM ejduiexe weibolg zZ 6 JONN O I
45. Developer When performing an online module change carefully read the following LL QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Appendix 3 1 Precautions on online module change This section lists precautions on an online module change Always perform an online module change in the correct procedure lt 37 Page 256 Appendix 3 4 A failure to do so can cause a malfunction or failure Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the programmable controller will not malfunction Provide means such as switches for powering off each of the external power supply and external devices connected to the module to be replaced online Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and malfunction of operating modules After the module has failed the buffer memory data may not be saved properly Prerecord the data to be saved It is recommended to perform an online module change in the actual system in advance to ensure that it would not affect the other modules For the operational verification check the following Means of cutting off the connection to external devices and its configuration are correct Switching on off does not bring any undesirable effect After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause ma
46. E E G U U aki MELSOFT Series GX Works2 EJ 10 Click the ev button Point The same input range must be selected for an offset setting and gain setting for the same channel 152 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS 8 5 2 Setting from a program 1 Setting procedure The following is the procedure to configure the offset gain setting using a sequence program d Start i Set the target channels in Offset gain 2 Y setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Switch to the offset gain setting mode More than one channel can be set simultaneously on the condition that 0 is set in Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 LA Check that the module is in the offset gain setting mode and the RUN Y LED is flashing Turn on Channel change request YB y v Change the input range SEE eode change completed v Apply the current whose value is the Turn off Channel change request YB same as the offset value Vv Set the target channels in Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 More than one channel can be set simultaneously on the condition that 0 is set in Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Adjust other channels 1 Register the offset gain setting to the CT input module by turning on User range write request YA v Check that Offset gain setti
47. Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module uejs g Jaujouy uM UONDUN4 UOeINBYUOD eu BuIsN 19S Sly SJSJSWEJEd pue pasn s Buey sN e ueuM Z OL 4 Checking operation 1 To check the operation click the Online Module Change button to cancel the control start Operation Target Module Module Change I O Address 0000 Execution Installation Module Name Q68CT Confirmation Status Change Module Installation Completion Module Control Restart Status Guidance The controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button Execute i To the next page 203 From the previous page 4 MELSOFT Application The online module change is stopped Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not canceled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again t Stop Monitor IG n Renate Nadie Cornedion R5 2320 System Image nitor Online Module Change Operation to Selected Modulo ain Base Parameter Jo NetworkNo Master Pont ddess Staton Ho PLC CU Q PAR Enptr Enply 1670mt 0010 Ery 16Pot 0020 Mar Error Mo Assignment Error Assiarment Incorrect
48. I O Signals ea a eens 5 24 Input signal m eiae cde c yx ARS We OR Rees NE UE 5 22 Output signals 2 Et bens tie Det a ee ae 050 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 6 1 List of Buffer Memory Addresses 000 ccc eee eee eens 6 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses 0 00 cece eee eens CHAPTER 7 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 7 1 Handling Precautions 00 00 cece 7 2 Settings and the Procedure Before Operation 0 00 cece eee eee 7 35 PartiNam8s eset sy fie ere tse a pied sted ies eed a tle ee ee pia T LA VINGE ea dude d cedere Boe os hs e fe oe iie ted o er Rd seb didis 7 44 Wiring precautions 2 2 5 nczsemiickocfLnebtecd uicem Rise gdbedonidk ded CAD External Wiring nma waters add late m a anse dea qut sg RR wee be CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS 8 1 Adding a Mod le erae RR ROTER ROE e e n ER ete 9 2 Switch Setting ane assistere GP PR REI YA pui PEE NUS 8 3 Parameter Setting oor pre recu LIIS ale TTS dE ERU 98 4 Auto Refresh Eo CER RC EUR epa eA RR URNRURUR eee aa 8 55 Offset gain Setting ulcer RR me xe YXRERRPPIER I DerP RS 8 5 1 Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 ilslelellslses 8 5 2 Setting from a program sissslllleel ne CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 9 1 Programming Procedure llsiilllellleellsl res 9 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration 9 2 1 Program e
49. Is the capacity of the power supply module sufficient Calculate the current consumption of the modules mounted on the base unit such as the CPU module I O module and intelligent function module and check that the power supply capacity is sufficient Is there any watchdog timer error Reset the CPU module and check if the RUN LED turns on If the RUN LED remains off the CT input module might fail Please consult a local Mitsubishi representative Is the module mounted on the base unit properly Is a module change enabled during an online module change Check the mounting condition of the module Refer to the following and take the corrective action ONLINE MODULE CHANGE s Page 182 CHAPTER 10 11 3 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flashes 1 When on Check item Action Is there any error Check the error code and take the action described in the error code list Error code list 37 Page 231 Section 11 1 2 2 When flashing Check item Action Is a value other than 0 set to Switch 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting Set 0 to Switch 5 of the intelligent function module switch setting 236 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 3 0 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes 1 When on Check item Action Is there any alarm output Check Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 or Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 2
50. PLC parameter contains an out of range value ca 158 4 Initial setting a Channel setting CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Setting Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 to CH8 Conversion enable disable setting Enable Enable Enable Disable Samplin Primary Dela Samplin Averaging process setting p 9 Count Average T d P 3 Processing Filter Processing Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant 0 50 Times 100ms 0 settings Sampling cycle setting 10ms 8CH Process alarm warning output setting Disable Enable Disable Disable P limit rocess alarm upper upper limi 0 7000 0 0 value Process alarm upper lower limit 0 6000 0 0 value Process alarm lower upper limit 0 1500 0 0 value Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 1000 0 0 Rate alarm warning output setting Disable Disable Enable Disable Rate alarm warning detection period 0 0 50ms 0 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 0 0 3 s 0 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 0 0 1 s 0 Input signal error detection setting Enable Disable Disable Disable Factory Default Factory Default Factory Default Factory Default Input range setting Range 0 to 5AAC Range 0 to 5AAC Range 0 to 5AAC Range 0 to 5AAC Peak current detection setting Enable Disable Disable Disable Peak current detection time 1000ms 1000ms 1000ms 1000ms Peak current detection value 7000 0 0 0 159 uoneunBijuo WISJS S PJEPUEIS e ui ejnpojy eui BuisN ueuM Z
51. Point Since 0 is set as the default value change the set value to use the process alarm CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 18 CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 Set the cycle for checking the change rate of digital output values for each channel For details on the warning output function rate alarm refer to the following e Warning Output Function Rate Alarm L gt Page 55 Section 4 10 2 a Setting range Setting range 10 to 5000ms Configure per 10ms unit A value per 1ms unit is rounded off In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 700 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The time average count average and rate alarm operate in the setting before the error occurs Setan integral multiple of the conversion cycle on each digital conversion method If these areas are not set as the integral multiple an alert is output at the maximum cycle satisfying the rate alarm warning detection period or less and the integral multiple of the conversion cycle Ex Rate alarm warning detection period for the following condition Digital conversion method Count average Count average 10 times Sampling cycle 100ms 8CH The conversion cycle is 1000ms 10 times x 100 ms Therefore set an integral multiple of 1000ms such as 1000ms or 2000ms for the rate alarm warning detection period Remark REESE When a
52. Port PLC Module Connection Us im E Seal Por Lc Made nesen Base and click the Detailed Information E Base Operation to Selected Module er Ly Main Base se Gu button Q10UDHEPU Detaledinformation HW iformetion Blagnestes _ Error Hstory Detal I Base Information list Module Information List Main Base Power Base Base Parameter 1O Network No Master Base Madle Base Model Name foter Typo Sts Status PES Series Model Name Point rome Port address Statin Nov PC Power Power A w QescT 16Point Inteli 16Point 0000 Empty Empty 16Point 0010 C Empty gt 6Point 0020 Legend Error Minor Error D Assignment Error_ Assignment Incorrect Stop Monitor Product Information List System Error History 2 Module s Detailed Information of the CT Module input module is displayed Model Name lgescr IO Address 0000 Mount Position Main Base 0 Slot A Product Information 40110000000000 Production Number Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify Agree I O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting E Input Type HW Information Remote Password Setting Status E
53. Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 54 Range ACO to 5A Dropout setting Set about the dropout of digital conversion Dropout detection setting 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Dropout value Peak current detection setting Set about the peak current detection of digital conversion IA Peak current detection setting O Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Peak current detection time 1000 ms 1000ms 100ms 100ms 10ms i000ms 1000ms 1000ms Peak current detection value 7000 TEEN TE JE es 0 grues yes Set about the logging function of digital conversion 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Set about the warning of digital conversion uoneJnByuo uejs s PJEPUEIS e ui einpoyy y Burs 1 uSuM Z6 e npouJ uomnouny jueBi jeyur By JO s1ejeureued Buisn ueuw ejduiexe urejDoJg L Z6 161 3 Auto refresh setting OD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q68CT gt Auto Refresh 0000 Q68CT Auto_Refresh 4 Writing the parameters of intelligent function module Write the set parameters to the CPU module and reset the CPU module or turn off then on the programmable controller power supply OD online gt Write to PLC or Power OFF ON
54. Scaling lower limit value Input range 0 to 100AAC CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Un G71 Un G73 Un G75 Un G77 20000 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 Un G70 Un G72 Un G74 Un G76 0 The digital output values and scaling values are as follows Scaling upper 20000 limit value 10000 Scaling value z p 1 p p p p Digital output value Scaling lower limit value 0L gt 0 100 o CT input value A Q S CT input value A Digital output value Scaling values 2 o 0 0 0 5 25 2500 5000 50 5000 10000 75 7500 15000 100 10000 20000 51 Ex 2 Setting values as Scaling upper limit value lower lt Scaling lower limit value Input range 0 to 100AAC CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Un G71 Un G73 Un G75 Un G77 10000 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 Un1G70 Un G72 Un G74 Un G76 0 The digital output values and scaling values are as follows 10000 Digital output value Scaling lower limit value 0 2 Scaling value Scaling upper limit value 10000 0 100 CT input value A CT input value A Digital output value Scaling values 0 0 0 25 2500 2500 50 5000 5000 75 7500 7500 100 10000 10000 52 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 10 Warning Output Fun
55. XF Turn on then off Error clear request YF 88 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE 5 2 2 Output signal 1 Default setting request Y5 Turn on then off Default setting request Y5 to return the present set value of buffer memory areas to the default value For the buffer memory areas which return to the default value refer to the following List of Buffer Memory Addresses Page 91 Section 6 1 For the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following e Default setting completed flag X5 7 5 Page 80 Section 5 2 1 2 When turning off then on Default setting request Y5 set Disable 1 to the setting values of Conversion enable disable setting UnNGO in all the channels and confirm that the digital conversion of the CT input module stops in all channels At stopping the digital conversion confirm if Converting or unused 0 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 If Default setting request Y5 is turned off then on for any of the channels while the digital conversion is performed the error code 116 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The present set values of the buffer memory areas do not return to the default value 2 Set value backup request Y6 Turn on then off Set value backup request Y6 to backup the present set value of the buffer memory areas to the non volatile memory For the buffer memory areas in which the set value
56. a module p Operation Target module change Module change execution 1 0 address 000H 5 DE Module name Q68CT Installation confirmation Status Change module selection completed Module control restart Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel 4 Whenthe following error window appears click the described in 03 Page 259 Appendix 3 5 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block 6 Remove the module Point Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 258 3 Mounting a new module Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H a n MODE Module name Q68CT Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module APPENDICES Mount a new module in the same slot and install the terminal block After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off 259 wes6ojd
57. are available Level data 0 Un G1072 to Level data 9 Un G1081 Use Level data O to monitor device values in other than the CT input module such as the CPU module For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 0 3 Page 60 Section 4 12 a Setting range Setting range 32768 to 32767 b Default value All are set to 0 c Example of use To monitor data register D100 in the CPU module and generate the level trigger in CH1 create a program as follows 1 Set 1073 Level data 1 to CH1 Trigger data Un G1064 When Level data 1 is used 2 Store the storage data of D100 in the program in Level data 1 Un1G1073 as needed The start I O number is set to 0 4 in the following program example MOV D100 G1073 XO Y9 Xo UO iT 42 CHLI Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1089 Set a value where a level trigger is generated for each channel in the logging function For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 1037 Page 60 Section 4 12 a Setting range Setting range 32768 to 32767 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0 132 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 43 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 The buffer memory address where the oldest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 for each chann
58. checked periodically In addition the time series data that are imported as logs can be checked easily 1 Logging function a Collectable data The following types of data can be collected Digital output value Scaling value b Number of collectable data The maximum 5000 logging data can be stored for each channel c Collection cycle The data can be collected in 10ms at the minimum and in 3600s at the maximum intervals For details on the collection cycle refer to the following Setting procedure K gt Page 62 Section 4 12 3 d Storing the collected data Logging data are stored orderly in the logging data storage area of the buffer memory starting from the head area Buffer memory v 1st data 2nd data 3rd data Ath data 5th data 6th data d Data to be collected D cc When data is stored in the 5000th data point area data is overwritten from the 1st data area k 4999th data MV 5000th data LI 60 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Logging procedure Start Set the logging function HER Page 62 Section 4 12 3 Start the logging operation gt gt Page 65 Section 4 12 4 Stop the logging operation a Page 65 Section 4 12 5 Check the logging stop in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 ME i 12 15 Check and save the logged data MER Page 67 Section 4 12 8 Resume t
59. current detection is not cleared after turning off the power supply or resetting the CPU module 17 sejymeej p 6 Logging function 5000 data can be collected for each channel The analysis of the collected data can improves maintainability of the system used 7 Backup of a set value to a non volatile memory Initial settings in the buffer memory can be backed up to a non volatile memory Initial settings do not need to be reset when the power supply is turned on or the CPU module is reset 8 Changeable slope of I O conversion characteristics A slope of I O conversion characteristics can be changed by configuring the offset gain settings 9 Easy setting with GX Works2 Sequence programming is reduced since initial settings or an auto refresh setting can be configured on the screen In addition setting status and operating status of modules can be checked easily 10 Online module change This module can be replaced without stopping the system 11 Reduced man hours and costs A signal converter is not needed A CT can be connected to a programmable controller directory using a CT input module as a result a signal converter installed outside is not required Therefore man hours and costs are reduced Analog input module DC voltage or DC electricity Signal converter Secondary current CT Primary current
60. current detection time 1000 R W O 321 1414 CH4 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 322 1424 CH5 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 323 1434 CH6 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 324 1444 CH7 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 96 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Address Address Default Read Write Set value decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 Cas ace 325 1454 CH8 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 326 146 CH1 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 327 1474 CH2 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 328 1484 CH3 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 329 1494 CH4 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 330 14Ay CH5 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 331 14B4 CH6 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 332 14Cy CH7 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 333 14D4 CH8 Peak current detection value 0 R W O 334 14E CH1 Peak current detection count 0 R 335 14Fy CH2 Peak current detection count 0 R 336 1504 CH3 Peak current detection count 0 R 337 1514 CH4 Peak current detection count 0 R 338 1524 CH5 Peak current detection count 0 R 339 1534 CH6 Peak current detection count 0 R 340 1544 CH7 Peak current detection count 0 R 341 155 CH8 Peak current detection count 0 R 342 1564 to to System area 999 3E74 1000 3E8y CH1 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O o 1001 3E9 CH
61. default setting gain value 0 R W mE 210 D24 CH5 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 211 D3y CH5 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 212 D44 CH6 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 213 D54 CH6 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 214 D64 CH7 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 215 D74 CH7 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 216 D84 CH8 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 217 D94 CH8 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 218 DAy CH1 User range setting offset value 0 R W 219 DBy CH1 User range setting gain value 0 R W 220 DCy CH2 User range setting offset value 0 R W 95 sessaippy JouaN yng JO ISIT L 9 Set value Address Address Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 podio ybi 221 DDy CH2 User range setting gain value 0 R W 222 DE CH3 User range setting offset value 0 R W 223 DFy CH3 User range setting gain value 0 R W 224 E04 CH4 User range setting offset value 0 R W 225 E1u CHA User range setting gain value 0 R W 226 E24 CH5 User range setting offset value 0 R W 227 E34 CH5 User range setting gain value 0 R W 228 E44 CH6 User range setting offset value 0 R W 229 E54 CH6 User range setting gain value 0 R W 230 E64 CH7 User range setting offset value 0 R W
62. device UO GO uoco Index register Zn Constant 3 K H E Others 43 P I J U D X DY N BL TR BL S V 1 For details on each device refer to the following 1 QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals LL Qn H QnPH QnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 2 FX and FY can be used for bit data only and FD for word data only 3 In the Constant and Others columns a device s that can be set for each instruction is shown The following data types can be used Data type Description Bit Bit data or the start number of bit data BIN 16 bit 16 bit binary data or the start number of word device BIN 32 bit 32 bit binary data or the start number of double word device BCD 4 digit Four digit binary coded decimal data BCD 8 digit Eight digit binary coded decimal data Real number Floating point data Character string Character string data Device name Device name data Unless otherwise specified this manual uses the following terms TERM Term Description CT input module The abbreviation for the Q68CT current transformer input module CT Another term for a current transformer QCPU Process CPU Another term for the MELSEC Q series CPU module A generic term for the QO2PHCPU Q06PHCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU Redundant CPU A generic term for the Q12PRHCPU and Q25PRHCPU
63. eouenbes e Bulsn peunBiuoo eje suas eiui pue pesn SI eBuej jnejap A0428 e USYM S E xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy eujuo e xipueddy 4 Checking operation 1 To check the operation click the Cancel button to cancel the control start Online module change MELSOFT series GX Developer x 2 Click the EJ button to leave the Online A ppe module change mode Sa a a 3 Clickthe oe button to close the System Monitor window pply Ei pply To the next page 260 APPENDICES From the previous page 4 4 Open the Device test window Device test Bit device pene Chose XO Online gt Debug gt Device test E 5 Hide history Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Enable 0 for the channel used Word device bulfer memory 6 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request C Device Y Y9 Buffer memory Modulestatl O 0000 v Hes 7 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 Address fo HEX to check if the digital conversion is performed Setting value properly 0 DEC v 16 bit integer Set Program Label reference program v Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF Ju Force ON Force OFF E Clear 0 8 Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOT
64. following buffer memory areas Collectable data Storage area of logging data Channel pater Buffer memory name memory Buffer memory name Buffer memory address address CH1 Un G11 Un G5000 to Un G9999 uz Un G12 Un G10000 to Un G14999 C cH8 Un G13 Un G15000 to Un G19999 gt H Un G14 Un G20000 to Un G24999 m Ton Me Un G15 Un G25000 to Un G29999 8 CH6 Un G16 Un G30000 to Un G34999 um Un G17 Un G35000 to Un G39999 E CH8 Un G18 f Un G40000 to Un G44999 9 CH1 Un G54 CHE Logging data Un G5000 to Un G9999 CH2 Un G55 Un G10000 to Un G14999 H3 UnG56 UmG15000to UmG19999 H Un G57 Un G20000 to Un G24999 CH5 sd ane Un G58 Un G25000 to Un G29999 CHE Un G59 Un G30000 to Un G34999 um Un G60 Un G35000 to Un G39999 CHB Un ce1 Un G40000 to Un G44999 67 1 Check the number of valid logging data with CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1113 When data is collected 5000 times or less When data is collected 5001 times or more v 1 Ty A ist data Valid data 1stdata i 2nd data A E sdede 2nd data l 3rd data 3rd data Valid data Gr 1 AT GA CHO Logging data 5 Ath data i Et 5th data Ne d 5th data CHO Logging data 5000 1 6th data A 6th data ne zx 1 Invalid data 4999th data Data stored in this area is not reliable 4999th data z 5000thdata V 5000thdat
65. industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2012 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION 278 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before using this product 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the sales representative or Mitsubishi Service Company However if repairs are required onsite at domestic or overseas location expenses to send an engineer will be solely at the customer s discretion Mitsubishi shall not be held responsible for any re commissioning maintenance or testing on site that involves replacement of the failed module Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty t
66. level of current that is detected as an input signal error depends on the input range setting The current level is about 12596 of the gain value for the input range Input range setting Detection level Factory default range 0 to 5AAC User range 0 to 5AAC Factory default range 0 to 50AAC User range 0 to 50AAC Approximately 6 25AAC Approximately 62 5AAC Factory default range 0 to 100AAC User range 0 to 100AAC Factory default range 0 to 200AAC User range 0 to 200AAC Approximately 125AAC Approximately 250AAC Factory default range 0 to 400AAC Approximately 500AAC User range 0 to 400AAC Factory default range 0 to 600AAC Approximately 750AAC User range 0 to 600AAC 44 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Notifying an input signal error When a CT input value exceeds the input range an input signal error is notified as follows Input signal error 1 is stored in Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal error detection signal XC turns on The ALM LED flashes Alarm code 1100 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Alarm codes are stored as below 1100 YH Fixed Input signal error channel number 3 Operation of the input signal error detection function In addition Converting or unused 0 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 on the corresponding channel and Conversion completed flag XE turns off When the CT input value returns within the input range the dig
67. logging data storage area 44 Page 134 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Check the number of data stored in the logging data storage Saclion B2 i E Un G1113 area 45 b Precautions Set CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 so that the data can be checked and read before the logging data are updated If the logging cycle is short logging data may be updated while the data are checked or read After the necessary data are logged monitor the change of the head pointer and the number of logging data and obtain logging data after the stored value changes If the update of the data and the data being checked do not synchronize due to the logging cycle and the scan time of the CPU module adjust the logging cycle To check data regardless of the logging cycle use the logging hold 71 uonoun4 6ui6607 zL 4 13 Set Value Backup Function 12 Set values in the buffer memory can be backed up into the non volatile memory The backup data are restored to the buffer memory when the power is turned off then on or when the CPU module is reset Therefore the Initial setting program does not need to be reset 1 2 3 4 Condition Use the set value backup function in a condition where no digital conversion is performed set Disable 1 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channels Check that digital conversion is disabled by confirming Converting or u
68. mE 231 E74 CH7 User range setting gain value 0 R W 232 E84 CH8 User range setting offset value 0 R W 233 E94 CH8 User range setting gain value 0 R W 234 EA to to System area 299 12By 300 12Cy Peak current detection setting OOFFy R W O 301 12Dy Peak current detection flag 0000 R EE 302 12Ey CH1 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 303 12Fy CH2 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W m 304 1301 CH3 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 305 1314 CH4 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 306 132 CH5 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 307 1334 CH6 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 308 1344 CH7 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 309 1354 CH8 Peak current detection count reset request 0 R W 310 1364 CH1 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 311 1374 CH2 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 312 1384 CH3 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 313 1394 CH4 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 314 13Ay CH5 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 315 13By CH6 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 316 13Cy CH7 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 317 13Dy CH8 Peak current detection count reset complete 0 R 318 13Ey CH1 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 319 13Fy CH2 Peak current detection time 1000 R W O 320 1404 CH3 Peak
69. not set as the integral multiple the time average and Primary delay filter are averaged at the maximum cycle satisfying the set time or less and the integral multiple of the sampling cycle In addition configure per 10ms unit A value per 1ms unit is rounded off When the value out of the setting range above is written in a channel an error occurs in the channel The error code 200 3001 3101 or 320 corresponding to Latest error code Un G19 is stored and Error flag XF turns on The conversion processing is performed based on the setting before the error occurs When a value is set to the channel for which the sampling processing is specified the set value is ignored a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to 0 Point Since 0 is set as the default value change the setting value depending on the digital conversion method 107 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jeyng Jo sjeled Z 9 3 Conversion completed flag Un G10 The conversion status can be checked with this flag for each channel b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO 0 1010101071010 O CH8 CH7 ICH6 ICH5 CH4 CH3ICH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Converting or unused 1 Conversion completed a Conversion completion When the first digital conversion is completed for the
70. of the conversion cycle for each digital conversion method If not change rates are detected in the maximum cycle that satisfies both of the following Rate alarm warning detection period or less Integral multiple of the conversion cycle In addition set a value per 10ms unit A value per 1ms unit is rounded off 4 Setvalues to CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value Un1G141 Item Setting range CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 Un G134 Un G136 Un G138 Un G140 32768 to 32767 3276 8 s to CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 Un G135 3276 7 s Un G137 Un G139 Un G141 uonoun4 yndjno Bulwer OL v 5 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 57 g Examples to use a rate alarm The change rate of digital output values in a limited range can be monitored easily as follows Ex 1 To monitor that a rising rate of a digital output value is within the specified range Change rate of digital output value 4 30 Rate alarm upper limit 20 N Rate alarm lower limit Ld Time Ex 2 To monitor a drop rate of a digital output value is within the specified range A Change rate of digital output value 0 Rate alarm upper limit 20 30 x Rate alarm lower limit Time Ex 3 To monitor a change rate of a digital output value is
71. of the terminal block Pin number Signal name 1 k CH1 CH1 2 E cut 3 k i CH2 CH2 4 L k ud 5 k CH3 CH3 cH3 8 l 7 k E CH4 CH4 8 L CH5 9 k k CH5 CH5 T CH6 m 7 k GHG 4 CH6 CH7 12 L cu 13 k Es CH7 7 k CH8 1 gt CH8 i NG 16 L NC 17 NC 18 NC SOWEN Hed Z 141 7 4 Wiring This section describes the wiring precautions and module connection examples of a CT input module 7 4 1 Wiring precautions External wiring that is less likely to be affected by noise is one of the conditions for a highly reliable system that fully utilizes the CT input module This section describes the precautions on external wiring Use separate cables for the AC control circuit and the CT input module s external I O signals to avoid influence of AC side surges and induction Do not locate external wires near the main circuit line high voltage circuit lines and load circuit lines of devices other than programmable controllers Also do not bunch external wires with these lines Otherwise the external wires are more likely to be affected by noise surges and induction Ground shielded cables at one end Asolderless terminal with an insulation sleeve cannot be used on the terminal block It is recommended to put a mark tube or an ins
72. online module change is complete MELSOFT Application d 212 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 9 when a User Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using the Configuration Function without Another System 1 Stopping operation 1 Create a new project New Project XO Project gt New 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC Cancel PLC Series id Type and click the button QCPU Q mode PLC Type Q372LP25 Q772BR 15 Remotel O v 3 Open the Transfer Setup window OD Navigation window Connection Destination view gt Connection destination data name All Connections 2 Connectioni wajsks Jeaujouy ynouym uonoun UONEINBYUO ey Bursf 19S eJy SJSJSWEJEqd pue pes s Sbuey asn e ueuM 6 0L 4 Configure the settings to access the module on the Transfer Setup Connection1 4 il d z ect Ccuk CCEBed Q Seres remote I O station and click the D Board Bus Hz com cow 1 Transmission Speed 115 2kbps button CCIE Field CCIE Field CCIE Field MAC AG QGTEL Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QI72LP25 BR15 p Connection Channel List Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 PLC Type Remotel O Detail CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CCLink C24 NET 10 H System Image BE Phone Line Connection C
73. out the offset gain setting value of the CT input module M11 SET M12 M12 Dedicated instruction GP OGLOAD UO D100 M20 J GP OGLOAD M20 M21 1 frst M12 M20 M21 Processing when an instruction execution is failed END 246 APPENDICES Appendix 1 3 c P ocsTOR Command G OGSTOR JL G 0 sTor un S H Command GP OGSTOR f 3 6P OGSTOR Un amp D Setting Internal device JOO Constant R ZR UO GO Zn Others data Bit Word Bit Word K H O O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of the module 0 to FE BIN 16 bits Within the range Start number of the device where control data is stored of the specified Device name device Device which turns on for one scan at the processing completion of the dedicated Within the range instruction of the specified Bit In error completion D 1 also turns on device 1 Specify the device specified to S on execution of the G P OGLOAD instruction Do not change the data which was read out by the G P OGLOAD instruction If the data is changed the normal operation may not be ensured HOLSDO d D E xpueddy uoHonsjsu pejeoipeq xipueddy 247 2 Control data
74. request Un G302 to F Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 in CHO Peak current 380 Un G309 is set to a value other than 0 and 1 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O detection count reset request Un G302 to Un G309 232 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error code PAE i Description and the error cause Action decimal CHO Dropout value UNG 162 to Un G169 is outside the range Set CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 in the 3901 of 1 to 10000 P range of 1 to 10000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O When a user range is set or restored the offset value is equal to 2 Set values so that they meet the following condition 400 or greater than the gain value Sr Offset value lt Gain value The channel where the error has occurred fits in O When the offset gain setting is configured channels or Os are i Correct the settings in Offset gain setting mode Offset set simultaneously in both Offset gain setting mode Offset eS 500 PEN specification Un G22 and Offset gain setting mode specification Un G22 and Offset gain setting mode Gain pM nie Gain specification Un G23 specification Un G23 Set one of the following values in CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un1G157 When the offset gain setting is configured CHO Input range User range 0 to SAAC 00104 5 setting Un G150 to Un G157 is set to a value outside the
75. set by the user 9 yp ML Lo System Device value is set by 8 Connection number Setting range 1 to 16 User BIN est the CPU module 2 Start number of the device from which control data are stored Device name Start number of the device which tums on for one scan upon system completion of the instruction ii 1 also tums on when failed Descriptions of 2 Control dat control data if any Device fem Description Setting range f Set by an System area me Completion status is stored Completion eH 00001 Completed System Other than 0000 Failed Error code UOPNASU VOUN 4 uogeotununuoz IOS P 3801008 d uojsuuos v funpeuucosi 63 Detailed descriptions of the instruction This instruction closes a connection specified in amp Disconnection of a connection The result of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction can be checked with the completion device 0 and 1 Completion device 5 0 Turns on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and tums off in the next END processing Completion device 5 1 Turns on or off according to the result of the SPSOCCLOSE instruction State Description When completed When failed Remains off Tums on in the END processing of a scan after completion of the SP SOCCLOSE instruction and tums off in the next END processing Conditions for the error and A detection of an operation error tums o
76. setting offset value System S415 CH6 Factory default setting gain value System S 16 CH7 Factory default setting offset value System S 17 CH7 Factory default setting gain value System S 418 CH8 Factory default setting offset value System 19 CH8 Factory default setting gain value System 20 CH1 User range setting offset value System S 21 CH1 User range setting gain value System S 22 CH2 User range setting offset value System 5 23 CH2 User range setting gain value System S 24 CH3 User range setting offset value System S425 CH3 User range setting gain value System S 26 CH4 User range setting offset value System S 27 CH4 User range setting gain value System S 28 CH5 User range setting offset value System 5 29 CH5 User range setting gain value System S 30 CH6 User range setting offset value System S 31 CH6 User range setting gain value System S 32 CH7 User range setting offset value System 5 33 CH7 User range setting gain value System 244 APPENDICES Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by S 34 CH8 User range setting offset value System 5 35 CH8 User range setting gain value System 1 These control data are unnecessary to be set When they are set offset gain setting values are not correctly read out
77. small value is set for the rate alarm upper limit value or the rate alarm lower limit value even a slight disturbance may cause the alert output to turn on To prevent this set a long rate alarm warning detection period b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0 Point P Since 0 is set as the default value change the set value to use the rate alarm 117 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo seq Z 9 118 19 CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G141 Set the change rate range of the digital output value for each channel For details on the warning output function rate alarm refer to the following e Warning Output Function Rate Alarm s Page 55 Section 4 10 2 a Setting range Setting range 32768 to 32767 3276 8 to 3276 7 s Set in 0 1 s Ex To set the rate alarm upper limit value to 30 s store 300 in the buffer memory The range must satisfy the following condition rate alarm upper limit value gt rate alarm lower limit value In the channel where the condition is not satisfied an error occurs The error code 340 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The rate alarm operates in the setting before the error occurs b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable
78. system O Enable O Enable O Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 0 Sampling Processing 2 Count Average 4 Primary Delay Filter 0 5ampling Processing 0 Sampling Processing O Sampling Processing O Sampling Processing 0 Sampling Process Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant 50 Times settings Sampling cycle setting 5 Warning output function Process alarm warning output setting 1 Disable Process alarm upper upper limit value i Process alarm upper lower limit value Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value 1000 Rate alarm warning output setting 1 Disable 1 Disable O Enable Rate alarm warning detection period om 50 ms Rate alarm upper limit value DO s 0 3 9s Rate alarm lower limit value 00 0 1 s Input signal error detection Set about the input signal of digital conversion Input signal error detection setting O Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable Scaling function Set about the scaling of digital conversion Scaling enable disable setting 1 Disable Scaling upper limit value Scaling lower limit value Input range setting Set about the input range of digital conversion O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default Input range setting Range ACO to 54 Range ACO to 54 Range ACO to 54
79. the connected moduie Page 74 Seaton 7 12 Model Nome Seka the model name ofthe connected co Page Seaton 7 13 Pos sm tr as Page Seaton 714 Sax Spes asa VO mumier foreach st Page 74 Seaton 718 pee Configure the switch setting of the bui UO or inteligent function modules Page 74 Section 7 18 33 ef The section of Cor Time Output Mode g nn ES ips oe page s seatin 717 B i Vo Response Tre 5E the current page is shown is ga Setting Start X Y enables modification on the start O numbers assigned to connected modules shows setting or G oil module is connected the assignment operating examples range of an input module is changed to X1000 to X100F For details refer to the following LL shows reference e CPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals manuals Point P Set the type of the connected module in Type Setting a different type results in SP UNIT LAY ERR Point shows notes that lt lt shows reference liaise EE eee require attention pages When an intelligent module is connected O assignment can be omitted by selecting connected modules from Intelligent Remark shows useful Function Module in the Project wit EEE SEE TEE DEAE information 73 1 The mouse operation example is provided below HE MELSOFT Series GX Works Unset Project IPRG MAIN i Project Edit Find Replace Compile View Online Debug Diagno Menu bar XZ
80. to 200AAC 300A or more 0 to 400AAC 600A or more 0 to 600AAC 900A or more CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 3 Accuracy The accuracy of the CT input module is measured for the maximum digital output value Even if the offset gain setting or input range was changed to change input characteristics the accuracy remains the same and is kept within the range described in performance specifications The following graph shows the fluctuation range of accuracy when the range of 0 to 200AAC is selected The accuracy is 0 5 50 digits when the ambient temperature is 25 5 C and 1 0 100 digits when the ambient temperature is 0 to 55 C excluding the case under noise effect 10000 Fluctuation range Digital output value QD N w gt 0 3 c 0 200 a Oo lt CT input value A suoneoiuioeds eoueuuoLegd ZE 31 3 2 4 32 Number of parameter settings Set initial settings and auto refresh settings of the CT input module so that the number of parameters including those of other intelligent function modules does not exceed the number of parameters that can be set in the CPU module For the maximum number of parameters that can be set in the CPU module refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection 1 Number of CT input module parameters For a CT input module the following number of parameters can be set Model Initial setting Auto refresh
81. two digits Last two digits 0 R u of the year of the year 1155 4834 CH1 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1156 4844 Hour Minute 0 1157 4854 Second Day of the week 0 1158 486 First two digits Last two digits 0 R of the year of the year 1159 487 CH2 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1160 4884 Hour Minute 0 1161 4894 Second Day of the week 0 1162 48A First two digits Last two digits 0 R of the year of the year 1163 48By CH3 Trigger Month Day 0 p detection time 1164 48Cy Hour Minute 0 1165 48D Second Day of the week 0 1166 48E First two digits Last two digits 0 R u of the year of the year 1167 48Fy CH4 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1168 4904 Hour Minute 0 1169 4914 Second Day of the week 0 4170 492 First two digits Last two digits 0 R m of the year of the year 1171 4934 CHS Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1172 4944 Hour Minute 0 1173 4954 Second Day of the week 0 1174 496 First two digits Last two digits 0 R u of the year of the year 1175 4974 CH6 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1176 4984 Hour Minute 0 1177 4994 Second Day of the week 0 1178 49Ay First two digits Last two digits 0 R e of the year of the year 1179 49B CH7 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1180 49Cy Hour Minute 0 1181 49Du Second Day of the week 0 101 sesseJppy Asoweyy yng JO ISIT L 9 Set value Address Addr
82. uoisJeAuo eyBIQ S Y 40 c Moving average Digital output values of the number of specified times are averaged in each sampling cycle The averaged values are stored in the buffer memory Digital output values to be averaged move one by one in each sampling cycle as below Ex Moving average processing of when the set number of times is four Digital output value Sampling cycle 10000 2 9 E 1st storage a 7 2nd storage b gt 3rd storage c Time ms CH1 Digital output i i i ae a Vales Veen i toa value Un G11 0 Ke DXOK X X X XX ON Conversion completed flag OFF Data transition in buffer memory 1st storage a 2nd storage b 3rd storage c 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 5 3 4 5 6 4 4 4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Primary delay filter Depending on the set time constant digital output values with smoothed noise can be obtained A smoothing degree varies by setting the time constant The following are the relational expressions of time constants and digital output values n 1 Yn 0 n 2 At yn 1 Vn Yn yn 1 At TA yn yn 1 n gt 3 Y Y Y Yni Yn n n 1 At TA yn Yn 1 Yn Present digital output value Yn Digital output value before smoothing Yn 1 Last digital output value Yn 1 Last digital output value before smoothing Number of sampling n
83. uviss corre Gere ease idet EA ar e Rr td art Rr etaed 35 42 Input Range Setting needed pee hadd Re bea d Reg Y o Ron ORDRE a 36 4 3 Conversion Enable Disable Function 0 00 00 0c cece A 37 4 4 Sampling Cycle Switching Function 000 00 37 4 5 Digital Conversion Method 0 000 cee cece ett e 38 4 5 1 Operations of digital conversion methods 0000 c cece sees 38 4 5 2 Setting procedures for digital conversion methods 00000 cece eee 43 4 6 Input Signal Error Detection Function 0 0 cect rank 44 4 7 Peak Current Detection Function 0 000 cee eee 46 4 8 Dropout Funcom sa 222 EE E FER even 49 4 9 gt Scaling FUNCION z er sr del inte RR sl ERR uden date PUR aad ges dde Aon 50 4 10 Warning Output Function 0 53 4 11 Maximum Value Minimum Value Hold Function 0 0 002 eee eee eee eee 59 4 12 Logging Function saurader ci a wet deta Neg uaa tos lees RR dead dees Roe 60 4 13 Set Value Backup Function lisse n 72 4 14 Default Setting Registration Function 000 0002 eee eee 73 4 15 Error History Function us ea Rte RR RR ACRI a EROR R Peek eR on tnc 74 4 16 Module Error Collection Function 0 2 0 0 ccc e 77 447 Error Clear Functions ansvar bL breene gid ondes 78 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE 5 1 VO Signal Bislang zo donee toe des I Deris ean ae eh ed ee 5 2 Details of
84. value 0 gt Yeo st raced EE EN REN EN EE TEE e Ti me Rate alarm lower limit value CH1 Warning output flag Rate alarm upper limit ON value Un G51 b0 OFF H OFF CH1 Warning output flag H r ON Rate alarm lower limit OFF i OFF value Un G51 b1 r r NON ON i Warning output signal X8 OFF 4 4 OFF a 4 OFF m Executed by the CT input module a Operation of warning output Digital output values are monitored in each set rate alarm warning detection period A change rate of the digital output value compared to the previous value is equal to or more than the rate alarm upper limit value s or that equal to or less than the rate alarm lower limit value s an alert is output as follows Alarm ON 1 is stored in Warning output flag Rate alarm UnXG51 Warning output signal X8 turns on The ALM LED turns on Alarm code 10ALI is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Alarm codes are stored as below 10ALI Fixed Rate alarm channel number 2 Rate alarm upper limit 3 Rate alarm lower limit However the digital conversion continues on the channel where an alert was output 55 uonoun4 1ndino Bulwer OL v b Operation after an alert was output When a digital output value is less than the rate alarm upper limit value or more than the rate alarm lower limit value Normal 0 is stored in the corresponding bit of Warning output flag Rate alarm UnYG51 for the cha
85. within the specified range A Change rate of digital output value 96 1096 Rate alarm upper limit 10 X Rate alarm lower limit 58 7 gt Time CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 11 Maximum Value Minimum Value Hold Function The maximum and minimum of digital output values or scaling values are stored in the buffer memory for each channel When time average or count average is specified as the averaging process the values are updated in each averaging process cycle For other digital conversion methods the values are updated in each sampling cycle For buffer memory addresses where the values are stored refer to the following List of Buffer Memory Addresses 37 Page 91 Section 6 1 1 Resetting maximum and minimum values The maximum and minimum values are updated to the present value when Maximum value minimum value reset request YD or Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off 2 Corresponding maximum and minimum values When the scaling function is enabled the maximum and minimum of scaling values are stored For details on the scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function s Page 50 Section 4 9 uondun4 ploy enjeA WNWIUIN EN EA WNWIXEN LLP 59 4 12 Logging Function Data can be collected consecutively in a set cycle and stored in the buffer memory Using the data stored in the buffer memory debugging can be performed and data variation can be
86. wrong on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem f Since Conversion enable disable setting Un GO has a channel pe Conversion PADI dene sening UGO to 115 Disable 1 for all channels then write the backup of conversion enable the backup data cannot be written Jata Since Conversion enable disable setting Un GO has a channel Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to 116 of conversion enable the values of buffer memories cannot be Disable 1 for all channels then execute the default restored to default settings setting registration function Start over the offset gain setting of all channels where the user range setting is used 420 An invalid value is set to the offset gain setting If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred The channel where the error has occurred cannot be identified on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Start over the offset gain setting of the channel where the error has occurred 120 An invalid value is set to offset gain setting If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed des
87. 0 11 12 If the values are proper save the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un G233 Point If the buffer memory values are improper compared to the reference table the offset gain values cannot be saved and restored Before resuming the control configure an offset gain setting according to the flowchart 3 Page 153 Section 8 5 2 Note that if module control is resumed without offset gain setting being made operation will be performed with the default values Switch the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning on Operating condition setting request Y9 214 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 2 Removing a module 1 Open the System Monitor window p Monitor Status Soar ea O Diagnostics gt Online Module Change 2 Select Online Module Change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online f Connection Channel Lst Sariai PoreNET LO H Remote Mode i o aa oon 0010 0020 Main Base Irformation List YO _ NetworkNo address Staton No Power Base stall Parameter l om eee eee RE o Power CPU Q QVAFZS25 cu Beso ede tone Master O1 Emy Empty 1 Pont 0010 02 my o Empty 1 Pont 0020 Eror Major Eror Moderate Error inor Error
88. 0 times may cause malfunction Before handling the module touch a grounded metal object to discharge the static electricity from the human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Disposal Precautions NCAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste CONDITIONS OF USE FOR THE PRODUCTO 1 Mitsubishi programmable controller the PRODUCT shall be used in conditions i where any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT if any shall not lead to any major or serious accident and ii where the backup and fail safe function are systematically or automatically provided outside of the PRODUCT for the case of any problem fault or failure occurring in the PRODUCT The PRODUCT has been designed and manufactured for the purpose of being used in general industries MITSUBISHI SHALL HAVE NO RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY AND ALL RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY BASED ON CONTRACT WARRANTY TORT PRODUCT LIABILITY FOR ANY INJURY OR DEATH TO PERSONS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO PROPERTY CAUSED BY the PRODUCT THAT ARE OPERATED OR USED IN APPLICATION NOT INTENDED OR EXCLUDED BY INSTRUCTIONS PRECAUTIONS OR WARNING CONTAINED IN MITSUBISHI S USER INSTRUCTION AND OR SAFETY MANUALS TECHNICAL BULLETINS AND GUIDELINES FOR the PRODUCT Prohibited Application Prohibited Applications include but not limited to the use of the PRODUCT in
89. 00ms 120 12000 100 10000 80 8000 CT input value A 60 Digital output value 40 4000 20 2000 0 0 42 Time ms CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 5 2 Setting procedures for digital conversion methods 1 Sampling processing 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set Sampling processing 0 to Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 3 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 2 Averaging process and primary delay filter 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set digital conversion methods to Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 Item Setting Time average 1 Count average 2 Moving average 3 Primary delay filter 4 Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 3 Set values to CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Item Processing Setting range Time average 40 to 5000 ms CHO Average time Average number of times Moving Count average 4 to 500 times average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Moving average 2 to 1000 times Primary delay filter 10 to 10000 ms 1 Set an integral multiple of the sampling cycle If not digital output values are averaged in the maximum cycle that satisfies both of the following Duration of the set time or less Integral multiple of the sampling cycle In additi
90. 1 The conversion cycle is 100ms The actual logging cycle is 1900ms an integral multiple of 100ms Point When Update cycle 0 is set to Logging cycle unit setting the logging is performed in the conversion cycle of the logging target data In this case the setting of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un1G1039 is ignored c Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting d Default value For CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to UnXG 1039 all channels are set to 300 For CHO Logging cycle unit setting UnXG1040 to Un G1047 all channels are set to Update cycle 0 129 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 38 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 Set the data points recorded from hold trigger occurs until logging holds stops for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 037 Page 60 Section 4 12 a Setting range Setting range 1 to 5000 In the channel where a setting value out of the above setting range is set an error occurs Then the error code 2040 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed When Disable 1 is set to CHO Logging enable disable setting UNVG 1000 to Un G1007 the setting for CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 is ignored b Enabling the settin
91. 11 CH1 Digital output value W1002 D12 CH2 Digital output value W1003 D13 CH3 Digital output value W1006 Warning output flag Process alarm W1007 Warning output flag Rate alarm W1008 Input signal error detection flag W1009 Peak current detection flag W1010 Latest error code MO CH1 Conversion completed flag M1 CH2 Conversion completed flag M2 CH3 Conversion completed flag M10 to M25 Warning output flag Process alarm M30 to M45 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 to M57 Input signal error detection flag M70 to M77 Peak current detection flag X1000 Module READY X100C Input signal error detection signal X100E Conversion completed flag CT input module X100F Error flag X Y1000 to X Y100F Y1009 Operating condition setting request Y100F Error clear request X20 Digital output value read command input signal X23 Input signal error detection reset signal QX10 X20 to X2F X24 Error reset signal Y30 to Y3F Error code display BCD 4 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F 175 ainpow uonounj 1ueBi ejui 94 JO s1ejeurejed Bulsn UuSYM ejduiexe weibolg L 6 OMJON O I BJOWSY ay uo ejnpoyy eui Burst USYM 6 176 2 Program example X20 X1000 2X100E Y1009 A MOV W1000 K2M0 MO I MOV W1001 D11 M1 i I MOV W1002 D12 M2 i
92. 1H 50ms 8CH 24 100ms 8CH 3H When the value out of the setting range above is written in a channel an error occurs in the channel The error code 350 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The sampling cycle performs in the setting before the error occurs a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value 10ms 8CH 0 is set as the default value 110 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 9 CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 The maximum and minimum values of the digital value digital converted for each channel are stored as signed 16 bit binary For details on the maximum and minimum values hold function refer to the following e Maximum Value and Minimum Values Hold Function gt Page 59 Section 4 11 CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 are updated to the present value when either of the following operations is performed When the setting is changed after Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off When Maximum value minimum value reset request YD is turned on then off Point When the time average method is specified the maximum and minimum values are stored in each average time specified When the count average method is specified the maximum and minimum values are stored in each count average specified When one of other digital conversion meth
93. 2 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O 1002 3EAy CH3 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O Q 1003 3EBy CH4 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O 1004 3ECy CH5 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O z 1005 3EDy CH6 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O 3 1006 3EEy CH7 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W z 1007 3EFy CH8 Logging enable disable setting 1 R W O 3 1008 3FO04 CH1 Logging hold request 0 R W 9 1009 3F1u CH2 Logging hold request 0 R W 1010 3F2y CH3 Logging hold request 0 R W 1011 3F3h CH4 Logging hold request 0 R W 1012 3F4y CH5 Logging hold request 0 R W 1013 3F5y CH6 Logging hold request 0 R W 1014 3F64 CH7 Logging hold request 0 R W 1015 3F7h CH8 Logging hold request 0 R W 1016 3F8y CH1 Logging hold flag 0 R 1017 3F9H CH2 Logging hold flag 0 R 1018 3FAY CH3 Logging hold flag 0 R 1019 3FBy CH4 Logging hold flag 0 R 1020 3FCy CH5 Logging hold flag 0 R 97 Set value Address Address Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 pen area 1021 3FDy CH6 Logging hold flag 0 1022 3FE CH7 Logging hold flag 0 1023 3FFy CH8 Logging hold flag 0 1024 400 CH1 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1025 4014 CH2 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1026 4024 CH3 Logging data setting 1 R W O 1027 4034 CH4 Logging data setting
94. 24 OK CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet Cink C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting To the next page 213 From the previous page v Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Device window C Device Name zi Buffer Memory Module Start 0000 HEX address o orc I XD Online gt Monitor EN Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Batch Address 7 6 5432 1 0 6 Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value y Disable 1 for all channels Device Label Buffer Memory 8 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Device Label Y9 ya v Data Type Bit ow Switch ON OFF Settable Range 9 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped with Conversion completed flag Un G10 Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delete C 10 if the buffer memory data are not recorded follow the procedures 11 and 12 11 Compare the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un G233 with the values in Range Reference Table gt Page 227 Section 1
95. 3 Input signal error detection reset signal QX10 X20 to X2F g Q X24 Error reset signal g Y30 to Y3F Error code display BCD 4 digits QY10 Y30 to Y3F S SB20 Module status S SB47 Baton pass status of own station 3 a SB49 Data link status own station SW70 Baton pass status of each station SW74 Cyclic transmission status of each station 177 178 2 NO Device Description SW78 Parameter communication status of each station T100 to T104 Interlock for own station and other stations Program example K4 a n MM J Check master station N baton pass status iv LM K3 y Check master station data link status K4 a rioz J Check remote I O station baton pass status K3 SW74 0 ER J Check remote I O station data link status SW78 0 H K3 Check remote I O station 7104 J parameter communications status B20 RST M103 T100 RST M104 T101 T102 T103 T104 SB20 T100 T101 T104 2 MA M A Mc No M100 Check master module status M103 SET M101 M100 X1000 M101 j PLS M102 RST M101 SET M103 M102 H MOV H0 D1150 MOV H0 D1151 MOV H0 D1152 MOV HOF8 D1000 MOV K50 D1002 MOV K100 D1003 MOV H420 D1024 MOV H0 D1026 MOV HOFE D1047 mov HoFBFD D1048 MOV K1000 D1090 MOV Ki500
96. 45Cu CH3 Trigger pointer 0 R OE 1117 45Du CH4 Trigger pointer 0 R BE 1118 45Ey CH5 Trigger pointer 0 R 1119 45Fy CH6 Trigger pointer 0 R 1120 4604 CH7 Trigger pointer 0 R 1121 461 CH8 Trigger pointer 0 R 2t 1122 462 s 0 R CH1 Logging cycle monitorin 1123 463 mid ag ms 0 R value 1124 4644 us 0 R 1125 4654 s 0 R CH2 Logging cycle monitorin 1126 46611 pa pr ms 0 R value 1127 4671 us 0 R 1128 4684 s 0 R a CH3 Logging cycle monitorin 1129 4691 aang ey Ad ms 0 R value 1130 46A us 0 R 1131 46By s 0 R CH4 Logging cycle monitorin 1132 460 eee ee ms 0 R m value 1133 46D us 0 R 1134 AGE s 0 R CH5 Logging cycle monitorin 1135 46F 9ging cy M ms 0 R value 1136 4704 us 0 R 1137 471 s 0 R am CH6 Logging cycle monitorin 1138 4724 saks be NONE ms 0 R value 1139 473 us 0 R 1140 4744 s 0 R 2 CH7 Logging cycle monitorin 1141 4754 Sr MR ms 0 R E value 1142 476 us 0 R ES 100 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Set value Address Address Default Read Write i Name 4 backup area decimal hexadecimal value 2 m 1143 4774 s 0 CH8 Logging cycle monitorin 1144 4784 gone Payee ms 0 value 1145 4794 us 0 1146 47A to to System area 1153 4814 1154 482 First
97. 5 3 Do not use a solderless terminal with an insulation sleeve Internal current consumption 5VDC 0 35A Weight 0 19kg 27 1SI suoneouioeds eoueuuopeg L Z suoneoiuioedg eoueuuoLed ZE 28 1 2 3 4 Except in case when the CT input module is influenced by noise The accuracy when a CT is connected is a sum of the CT input module s accuracy and the CT s accuracy The following is the formula to calculate accuracy Accuracy Accuracy of the CT input module Accuracy of the CT to be used For the accuracy of the CT to be used contact its manufacturer The default value is 10ms 8CH Response time complies with IEC 60688 The larger one of the following The time from when the CT input changes from 0 to 90 till when the converted digital value reaches 90 1 The time from when the CT input changes from 100 to 10 till when the converted digital value reaches 10 1 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 3 2 2 I O conversion characteristics An I O conversion characteristic is expressed with the slope of the line connecting an offset value and gain value when a CT input value current is converted to a digital value 1 Offset value This is the CT input value current converted to the digital output value of 0 2 Gain value This is the CT input value current converted to the digital output value of 10000 3 I O conversion characteristics The following graph shows the I O conv
98. 6 9 2 1 160 Program example when using parameters of the intelligent function module 1 Device for user Device Description DO Conversion completed flag D1 D11 CH1 Digital output value D2 D12 CH2 Digital output value D3 D13 CH3 Digital output value D6 Warning output flag Process alarm D7 Warning output flag Rate alarm D8 Input signal error detection flag D9 Peak current detection flag D10 Latest error code MO CH1 Conversion completed flag M1 CH2 Conversion completed flag M2 CH3 Conversion completed flag M10 to M25 Warning output flag Process alarm M30 to M45 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 to M57 Input signal error detection flag M70 to M77 Peak current detection flag X0 Module READY XC Input signal error detection signal XE Conversion completed flag CT input module X YO to XF Error flag XIYF Y9 Operating condition setting request YF Error clear request X10 Digital output value read command input signal X13 Input signal error detection reset signal QX10 X10 to X1F X14 Error reset signal Y20 to Y2F Error code display BCD 4 digits QY10 Y20 to Y2F CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 2 Parameter setting Set the contents of initial settings to the parameters OD Project window gt Intelligent Function Module gt Q68CT gt Parameter gt 0000 Q68CT Parameter CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH CHE Set the digital conversion
99. 6 ModuleA Error A2 Example of screen display Error History List Displayed Errors Errors 94 189 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Model Name Start JO 0141 2012 02 13 01 0000 0141 2012 02 13 01 58 35 Q68CT 0000 0141 2012 02 13 01 58 16 Q68CT 0000 0481 2012 02 08 22 02 12 Q68CT 0000 0407 2012 02 08 20 58 19 Q68CT 0000 0407 2012 02 08 20 58 19 Q68CT 0000 Point For details on the module error collection function refer to the following I QnUCPU Module User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 1 Compatible version The following table lists the versions of CPU modules and GX Works2 compatible with the module error collection uoNdUN4 UONDAJ OO JOUI SINPON OL F function Item Version CPU module Universal model QCPU with a serial number first five digits of 11043 or later GX Works2 Version 1 09K or later TT 4 1 T Error Clear Function When an error occurs the error can be cleared on the system monitor By clicking the button in the system monitor the latest error code stored in Latest error code Un1G19 is cleared and the ERR LED turns off This operation is the same as the one that uses Error clear request YF However the error history cannot be cleared with the button For the error clearing method using Error clear request YF refer to the following Error clear request YF gt
100. 701 value other than 0 and 1 a Un G1008 to Un1G1015 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O 4 These error codes can be cleared by turning on then off Error clear request YF 2 This error code is not stored in Latest error code Un G19 but in the completion status of the G P OGSTOR instruction 234 1 11 2 Alarm Code List This section describes alarm codes that occur in a CT input module 1 Alarm code checking method CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Alarms occurred in the CT input module can be checked by the same methods as those for errors 7 gt Page 228 Section 11 1 1 2 Alarm code list The following table lists alarm codes Alarm code RE i Description and the alarm cause Action decimal When the digital output value returns to the one i within the setting range the following turns off A process alarm or a rate alarm is occurring The corresponding bit of Warning output flag The channel where a process alarm or rate alarm has occurred fits in O Process alarm Un G50 i The corresponding bit of Warning output flag A value fits in A indicates that the alarm status is as follows 10ALI p i limit Rate alarm Un G51 Re ee APRS A Warning output signal X8 1 Process alarm lower limit Bundes MU The alarm code can be cleared by turning off on salsa e oid E and off Error clear request YF after the digital 3 Rate alarm lower limit en output value retur
101. 72LP25 8R15 a onnection Channel List m _ Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 PLC Type Remoteljo Detail CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CC Link C24 System Image NET 10 H CCIECont CCIEFild Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Phone Line Connection C24 Multiple CPU Setting a eee 4 To the next page 200 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE From the previous page 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 9 Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Donn window C vevicename Bun I s zi sl XO Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Ba tch Address FIE DIcislal9ls 7 6 5 4 321110 ifotototolotofatorerorororoforore a 6 Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Y Disable 1 for all channels Device Label Buffer Memory 8 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Device Label Y9 va Data Type Bit on Switch ON OFF m Settable Range 9 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped with Conversion completed flag Un G10 Execution Result Execution Result Device
102. 9 Up to 16 errors occurred in the module are recorded For details on the error history function refer to the following e Error History Function gt Page 74 Section 4 15 b15 to b8 br to bO Un G1810 Error code Un G1811 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1812 Month Day Un G1813 Hour Minute Un G1814 Second Day of the week Un G1815 System area Un G1819 Storage Item Storage contents example First two digits of the year Last two digits of the 20114 year Month Day Stored in BCD code 329 Hour Minute 10354 o N Second 404 Oo c One of the following values is stored for each day of the week in BCD code 9 Sunday 00 Monday 01 3 Day of the week 024 Tuesday 02 Wednesday 03 Thursday 04 Friday 05 3 o Saturday 06 lt 1 Those are values when an error occurs at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 a D o 51 CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un1G44999 These are the areas for storing the logged data for each channel Up to 5000 data can be stored per channel After the 5001st data for CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 for each channel the logging is continued with the data overwritten from the head For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function s Page 60 Section 4 12 Point When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off the logging d
103. 9 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC Mitsubishi Programmable Controller MELSEG Led cries MELSEC Q Current Transformer Input Module User s Manual Q68CT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using this product Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The precautions given in this manual are concerned with this product only For the safety precautions of the programmable controller system refer to the user s manual for the CPU module used In this manual the safety precautions are classified into two levels A WARNING and AN CAUTION AN WARNING Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions N CAUTION resulting in minor or moderate injury or property damage Under some circumstances failure to observe the precautions given under A CAUTION may lead to serious consequences Observe the precautions of both levels because they are important for personal and system safety Make sure that the end users read this manual and then keep the manual in a safe place for future reference Design Precautions NWARNING Do not write any data to the system area and write protect area of the buffer memory in the intelligent function module Also do not use any use prohibited si
104. 90W34 eui uo ejnpojy eu Burst ueuM 6 M204 M205 A ZP REMTO NT K1 K1 HO K47 D1047 K2 M206 B M206 M207 4 zP REMTO yt K1 K1 HO K90 D1090 K4 M208 M208 M209 M zP REMTO J1 K1 K1 HO K120 D1120 K1 M210 M210 M211 JH 12P REMTO ns K1 K1 HO K130 D1130 K2 M212 gt Write to the buffer memory M212 M213 ME zP REMTO J1 K1 K1 HO K300 D1300 Ki M24 e M214 M215 4 zP REMTO J1 K1 K1 HO K318 D1318 Ki M216 M216 M217 M zP REMTO J1 K1 K1 HO K326 D1326 K1 M218 J der 0000 Mva aE My ser vios j Turn on Operating condition setting request M103 Y1009 X1009 P T ME Rer vios Turn off Operating condition setting request SET M104 X20 M104 X1000 X100E Y1009 A Ko 2 M300 M301 D2010 0 m H Mov D2011 Dt Read CH1 Digital output value D2010 1 p MOV D2012 D12 Read CH2 Digital output value D2010 2 mov D213 13 Read CH3 Digital output value FK0 S ______ REMFR J1 K2 K1 HO K10 D2010 K4 m300 Read Conversion completed flag SM400 Z REMFR J1 K3 K1 HO K301 D2301 K1 M310 M310 M311 i H A Mov D2301 K2W70 Read Peak current detection flag M70 Processing when a peak current is IM M MM Processing when a peak current is detected detected for CH1 Peak current detecti
105. 94 5Ey CH3 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 95 SFuy CH3 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 96 604 CH3 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 97 614 CH3 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O 98 624 CH4 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 99 63H CH4 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 100 644 CH4 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 101 65H CH4 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O 102 664 CH5 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 103 674 CH5 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 104 684 CH5 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 93 Set value Address Address Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 pe ce 105 694 CH5 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O 106 6AH CH6 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 107 6B CH6 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 108 6Ch CH6 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 109 6Du CH6 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O 110 6Ey CH7 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 111 6Fy CH7 Process alarm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 112 70H CH7 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 113 71H CH7 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O 114 724 CH8 Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 R W O 115 73H CH8 Process ala
106. A At Sampling cycle processing TA Time constant ms 1 When n is 2 or larger Conversion completed 1 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 2 Set a value which is equal to or larger than the sampling cycle If the time constant is smaller than the sampling cycle the error error code 32L1 occurs and the digital output value becomes 0 41 SPOUJEW UOISJSAUOD eLHIp Jo suongejedo G poyjey UOIsJaAUOD eENBIG S Y Ex 1 Change of digital output values under the following conditions Input range 0 to 100AAC Sampling cycle 10ms 8CH Time constant setting 1000ms 1s CT input value changed from 0A to 100A When 1000ms passes after the CT input value reaches 100A the digital output value with a primary delay filter reaches 63 2 of the digital output value in the sampling process CT input value Digital output value 120 12000 100 10000 80 8000 CT input value A 60 6000 Digital output value 40 4000 20 7 2000 0 0 0 1000 Time ms Ex 2 When CT input values form a ringing waveform change of digital output values in the following conditions Time constant setting 2000ms 2s Time constant setting 1000ms 1s Moving average processing 16 times CT input value Digital output value Moving average processing 16 times Digital output value Time constant setting 1000ms Digital output value Time constant setting 20
107. AC 0 to 100AAC Input range 0 to 200AAC 0 to 400AAC 0 to 600AAC Converted 0 to 12000 Digital output current value Scaling value 32768 to 32767 Input frequency 50 60Hz Excessive input 200 for 1 minute 150 for continuous time Input range Digital output value Maximum resolution 0 to SAAC 0 5mA 0 to 50AAC 5mA I O characteristics maximum resolution Dee 0 to 10000 ae 0 to 200AAC 20mA 0 to 400AAC 40mA 0 to 600AAC 60mA Ambient Accuracy temperature Within 0 5 50 digits accuracy for the 25 5 C maximum digital Ambient output value temperature Within 1 0 100 digits 0 to 55 C Sampling cycle 10ms 8CH 20ms 8CH 50ms 8CH 100ms 8CH Response time 0 4s or less Number of access to the non volatile memory Up to 107 times Isolation method Between input terminals and the programmable controller power supply Transformer Between input channels No isolation Dielectric withstand voltage Between I O terminals and the programmable controller power supply 1500VACrms for 1 minute Insulation resistance Between I O terminals and the programmable controller power supply 500VDC 10MQ or higher Number of occupied I O points 16 points I O assignment 16 points for intelligent External connection system 18 point terminal block Applicable wire size Applicable solderless terminal 0 3 to 0 75mm R1 2
108. Corporation in the United States and other countries Ethernet is a trademark of Xerox Corporation All other company names and product names used in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies SH NA 081033ENG A 280 SH NA 081033ENG A 1203 MEE MODEL Q68CT U E MODEL CODE 13JZ66 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE TOKYO BUILDING 2 7 3 MARUNOUCHI CHIYODA KU TOKYO 100 8310 JAPAN NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 CHOME HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
109. Create anew project New Project oject Type OD Project gt New Simple Project 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR1 5 Remotel O in PLC PLC Series B Type and click the button QCPU Q mode PLC Type Q372LP25 Q772BR 15 Remotel O v 3 Open the Transfer Setup window OD Navigation window gt Connection Destination view 5 gt Connection destination data name All Connections ay Connection1 Configure the settings to access the module on the GER Fr remote I O station and click the Hess BEG CCdlink Ethernet USB NETI1O H Board Board Bus Board com COM Transmission Speed 115 2kbps button tao dn CCIEFld CCIEField CCIE Field MAC AG QSTEL G4 NETIAO H Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Remote Module Head Module Adapter aff Computer Type QJ72LP25 BR15 Transfer Setup Connection1 i um Connection Channel List m No Specification Other Station Other Station Single Network exi j PLC Direct Coupled Settir Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 PLC Type Remotelj Detail CCIE Cont CC IE Field Ethernet NET 10 H System Image Phone Line Connection C24 OK CCIE Cont CCIE Field Ethernet NET 10 H Accessing Host Station p Multiple CPU Setting To the next page WEe16014 eouenbes e Bulsn 185 aly sjejeureijeg pue pasn s eBues jnejeq Hope e uayM 9 0L 193 From the previous page Device Buffer Memory Batch Mo
110. ELI AP Dd 132 Conversion completed flag Un G10 108 Conversion completed flag XE 88 Conversion enable disable function 37 Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 106 Count average 20 0c eee eee 39 CT input value ee 35 Default setting completed flag X5 80 Default setting registration function 73 Default setting request Y5 89 Digital Conversion Method Averaging process 00 00000e 38 Primary delay filter 2 2 0 0 0 cee eee 41 Sampling processing 00 38 Digital conversion method 38 Digital output value 20002005 35 Dropout detection setting UnG160 120 Dropout function llle 49 Dropout status flag Un G161 121 Error clear function llle 78 Error clear request YF 000000050 90 Error flag XF 000000 e eee a 88 Error history function llle eee 74 Error history No O Un G1810 to Un G1969 137 External wiring 200000 eee kne 143 G P OFFGAN 9 ove ea ponte ea E Cue 241 GIP OGLOAD ard rosse dee raa res ids 243 GIP OGSTOR ae UAE ARI 247 Galn VALU Si 5 eda pede pb TRE dd 29 Hardware LED information Ls 239 Hardware switch information 239 VO assignment llli eee eee 251 I O conversion characteristics 29 Input
111. ET H remote I O module A module of function version D or later is necessary Compatible version of GX Developer GX Developer of Version 7 10L or later is necessary To perform an online change on a remote I O station GX Developer of Version 8 17T or later is necessary The CT input module does not support GX Configurator AD therefore configure initial settings in a sequence program Restrictions of base unit When the module is mounted on any of the following base units an online module change cannot be performed Slim type main base unit Q3LISB Extension base unit Q501B which does not require the power supply module An online module change cannot be performed for all modules on the base unit APPENDICES Appendix 3 3 Online module change operations The following table explains the operations for an online module change O Executed x Not executed Operation of the CPU module User operation Speretono the CT input module X Y FROM TO Dedicated Device refresh instructions instruction test 1 Stop the operation A Turn off all of the Y signals The module is operating O O O O turned on using the sequence normally program v Y 2 Remove the module The operation of the module Start th
112. FT series GX Developer c3 Click the Ca button to leave the Online i T me ge module change mode System Monitor E Click the oe button to close the System Monitor window Y To the next page 266 APPENDICES From the previous page 4 4 Open the Device test window Device test Bit device pene Chose XO Online gt Debug gt Device test E 5 Hide history Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to FORCE ON FORCE OFF Toggle force Enable 0 for the channel used Word device bulfer memory 6 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request C Device Y Y9 Buffer memory Modulestatl O 0000 v Hes 7 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 Address fo HEX to check if the digital conversion is performed Setting value properly 0 DEC v 16 bit integer Set Program Label reference program v Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF Ju Force ON Force OFF E Clear 0 8 Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING 37 Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off f Error flag XF is off 9 Since the new module is in the default status initial settings must be configured using a sequence program after the control resumed Before the initial setting ch
113. G341 is saved automatically in the non volatile memory in the CT input module When the module starts up by turning off then on or resetting the CPU module the saved detection count is read in CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 Therefore the number of peak current detection is not cleared even after the power supply was turned off then on or the CPU module was reset The count range of CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 is 0 to 32767 When the number of peak current detection exceeds the upper limit of the count range the number returns to 0 Digital output value n Peak current Peak current Peak current detection time detection time detection time Peak current detection value Time CH1 Peak current detection count 0 xX 1 Un G334 32767 X 0 Point When a digital output value has exceeded the peak current detection value at power on the number of peak current detection is added 1 a Resetting the number of peak current detection To reset the number of peak current detection store Reset requested 1 in CHO Peak current detection count reset request Un G302 to Un G309 0 is stored in CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 After the reset was completed Reset request completed 1 is stored in CHO Peak current detection count reset complete Un G310 to Un G317 uonouny uonoejeq 1USUN yeed 7p sees Controlled by the CT input modu
114. ING gt Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Error flag XF is off 9 Since the new module is in the default status initial settings must be configured using a sequence program after the control resumed Before the initial ueJBoud eouenbes e Buisn peunBiuoo eje suas eiui pue pesn si eBuej j nejep A0428 e ueuM S E xipueddy setting check if the initial setting program is proper satisfying the following Normal system configuration The sequence program should set the initial setting on the leading edge of Module READY X0 of the CT input module Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after RUN In this case the initial setting is not set When used on remote I O network Insert a user device where the initial setting will be set at any timing initial setting request signal into the sequence program 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy eujuo e xipueddy Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network In this case the initial setting is not set 261 5 Resuming operation 1 Open the Online module change window again Online module change OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change 2 Click the Execution button on the appeared window to resume control Module READY X0 turns on 3
115. Input signal error detection setting 0 Enable 1 Disable default value Page 44 Section 4 6 Scaling function Scaling enable disable setting 0 Enable 1 Disable default value Scaling upper limit value 32000 to 32000 default value 0 Scaling lower limit value 32000 to 32000 default value 0 Page 50 Section 4 9 Input range setting Input range setting 0 Factory Default Range 0 to 5AAC default value 1 Factory Default Range 0 to 50AAC 2 Factory Default Range 0 to 100AAC 3 Factory Default Range 0 to 200AAC 4 Factory Default Range 0 to 400AAC 5 Factory Default Range 0 to 600AAC 16 User Range 0 to 5AAC 17 User Range 0 to 50AAC 18 User Range 0 to 100AAC 19 User Range 0 to 200AAC 20 User Range 0 to 400AAC 21 User Range 0 to 600AAC Page 36 Section 4 2 Dropout setting Dropout detection setting 0 Enable 1 Disable default value Dropout value 1 to 10000 default value 50 Page 49 Section 4 8 147 Bunes sejeweleg cg Item Setting value Reference Peak current detection setting 0 Enable Peak current 1 Disable default value Page 46 detection setting Peak current detection time 10 to 10000ms default value 1000 Section 4 7 Peak current detection value 0 to 11999 default value 0 1 0 Enable Logging enable disable setting 1 Disable default value f ms 10 to 32767 default v
116. Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delete C wajsks Jaujouy UNM UONDUN4 uonenbyuon ay Buisn JES aly sjeyeueJeg pue pasn s eBues sN e ueuM Z OL 201 2 Removing a module O mu REE Mode System Monitor Online Module Chenge M Operation to Seloctod Modulo Eo sd oom 20102020 Main Base Informal Parameter 10 NetworkNo Master Point Address Station No Power GU Q 072255 Enpty Empty t 0010 Empty 16Point _ 0020 Mair Eror Mode Mader Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Online Module Change Operation _ p Target Module Module Change 1 0 Address pooo Execution Module Name Q68CT Installation Confirmation Status p Module Selection Completed Module Control Restart Status Guidance lease turn off Y signal of the changed module hen you change the intelligent Function module lease press next button when you are ready Gs Point Open the System Monitor window of the remote VO module OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Click the button to enable a module change When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation describe
117. Module READY X0 turns off in the following cases When the offset gain setting mode is set The digital conversion processing is executed When a watchdog timer error occurs in the CT input module The digital conversion processing is not executed 2 Default setting completed flag X5 Use Default setting completed flag X5 as an interlock condition to turn on then off Default setting request Y5 When the buffer memory settings return to the default by turning on Default setting request Y5 Default setting completed flag X5 turns on When Default setting request Y5 is turned off Default setting completed flag X5 also turns off The buffer memory areas which return to the default value are with O in the Set value backup area in the List of Buffer Memory Addresses 7 2 Page 91 Section 6 1 gt Controlled by the CT input module gt Controlled by the sequence program Default setting request Y5 1 Conversion enable disable setting Enable 1 Disable Un GO i i y Values in Data before the default Bera lt value Change the default value the buffer memory areas setting is completed i depending on a situation Default setting completed flag X5 Operating condition setting request Y9 OFF M OFF PAG ON i i ON Operating condition MBA setting completed flag X9 Vora Point The setting of buffer memory areas whose defau
118. New Module window Project window Intelligent Function Module Right click New Module New Module Module Selection Module Type Analog Module Y Module Name oeacr Y Mount Position Base No Y Mounted Slot No o Acknowledge I O Assignment V Specify start XY address 0000 H 1 Slot Occupy 16 points r Title Setting Title cms Item Description Module Type Set Analog Module Module Selection Module Name Set the name of the module to mount Base No Set the base No where the module is mounted Mounted Slot No Set the slot No where the module is mounted Mount Position Mp M POET Ac MMC KMS HAE MM UC NR RR RR Specify start XY The start I O number hexadecimal of the target module is set according to address the mounted slot No Any start I O number can be set Title Setting Title Set any title 144 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS 8 2 Switch Setting Set the operation mode 1 Setting procedure Open the Switch Setting window DO Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Module namer gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0000 Q68CT Drive Mode Setting Normal Digital Conversion Mode This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter contains an out of range value cm Item Des
119. Nuclear Power Plants and any other power plants operated by Power companies and or any other cases in which the public could be affected if any problem or fault occurs in the PRODUCT Railway companies or Public service purposes and or any other cases in which establishment of a special quality assurance system is required by the Purchaser or End User Aircraft or Aerospace Medical applications Train equipment transport equipment such as Elevator and Escalator Incineration and Fuel devices Vehicles Manned transportation Equipment for Recreation and Amusement and Safety devices handling of Nuclear or Hazardous Materials or Chemicals Mining and Drilling and or other applications where there is a significant risk of injury to the public or property Notwithstanding the above restrictions Mitsubishi may in its sole discretion authorize use of the PRODUCT in one or more of the Prohibited Applications provided that the usage of the PRODUCT is limited only for the specific applications agreed to by Mitsubishi and provided further that no special quality assurance or fail safe redundant or other safety features which exceed the general specifications of the PRODUCTS are required For details please contact the Mitsubishi representative in your region INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q series programmable controllers This manual describes the operating procedure system configuration parameter settings
120. ODULE CHANGE From the previous page 4 3 Click the Monitor window button to close the System p Monitor Status Connection Channel Lst Q mu Ld or Onine Module Change Ho ac na nin ore Operation to Selected Med IjO NetworkNo Master maint Address Stabon No PLC Empty 1 Pont 0620 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring EEK Device 1 window Device Name en Mad E US AE zibe I OD Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Mody Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Batch Address F E b c B A 9 8 7 6 s 4 3 2 1 0 ifotototolotofatorerororofoforcre 5 Enterand display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO i To the next page ureJ604g eouenbes e Bulsn jes aly sjejeuredeg pue pasn s eBues jnejeq AJojoe4 e uayM 9 0L 197 From the previous page 4 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label ya Data Type Bit T ON Settable Range Execution Result lt lt Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delete C 198 Set Conversion enable disable setting UnYG0 to Enable 0 for the channel used and turn on then off Operating condition se
121. OGSTOR instruction completion Normal completion the device remains off Error completion the device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P DOGSTOR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing END END END END processing X processing processing processing Sequence program ped i ON Execution completion of the G P OGSTOR instruction i G P OGSTOR OFF OFF GA i instruction i ON OFF OFF Completion device D Pu escapes z P 1 1 DD 7 ON Execution failed ag Completion status OFF eee Aor Execution succeeded wy SE indication device D 1 i 1 scan i CO og DER 4 Errors og 0 5 In the following cases an error occurs and error code is stored in completion status 1 ag 26 3 Error code Description of operation error 161 G P OGSTOR instruction is executed in the offset gain setting mode 162 G P OGSTOR instruction is continuously executed G P OGSTOR instruction is executed to the different model from the one to which G P OGLOAD 163 instruction is executed G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed before the execution of G P OGLOAD instruction 249 5 Program example The following shows the sequence program of the CT input module installed in I O number X Y00 to X YOF with the following conditions Turning off M11 writes the offset gain setting value to the CT input module
122. PLC Module Connection USB System Image Refine Search Match all of the criteria below 1 Model Name matching Q68CT 2 Start I O matching 0000 Clear Refine Criteria Enter Refine Criteria Error History List Error Details Displayed Errors Errors 94 189 Error Code Notation DEC HEX Model Name Q68CT Start I O 0000 00189 0065 28 Q68CT 0000 00187 2012 02 13 01 58 55 00186 2012 02 13 01 58 35 Error and Solution Intelligent Module Information 00185 2012 02 13 01 58 16 00172 2012 02 08 22 02 12 00171 2012 02 08 20 58 19 00170 2012 02 08 20 58 19 CH1 Input range setting Un G150 is set to a value 00169 2012 02 08 20 58 19 outside the range of 0000H to 0005H or 0010H to 00168 2012 02 08 20 58 19 LOUER 00167 2012 02 08 20 58 18 00166 2012 02 08 20 58 18 00165 2012 02 08 20 58 18 00164 2012 02 08 20 58 18 Set CH1 Input range setting Un G150 to a value 00163 2012 02 08 20 58 18 within the range of 0000H to 0005H or 0010H to 00162 2012 02 08 20 58 18 EDER 00161 2012 02 08 20 58 18 00160 2012 02 08 20 58 18 00159 2012 02 08 20 58 18 00158 2012 02 08 20 58 18 Clear History Refresh Create CSV File Close Errors to be collected The contents under Error code list 7 5 Page 231 Section 11 1 2 are reported to the CPU module Mount Position Main Base Slot No 0 Explanation Solution 230 2 Error code list CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING If the following errors occu
123. Page 90 Section 5 2 2 7 WS Diagnostics gt System Monitor gt Error Module Module s Detailed Information 78 Monitor Status Module EM Model Name Q68CT I O Address 0000 Mount Position Main Base 0 Slot Product Information 140110000000000 C Production Number L Module Information Module Access Possible Status of External Power Supply Fuse Blown Status Status of I O Address Verify I O Clear Hold Setting Noise Filter Setting Input Type HIW Information Remote Password Setting Status Error Information Latest Error Code Update Error History i 0148 Contents CH1 Average processing setting Un G24 is set to a value z outside the range of 0 to 4 Error Clear Error Code 014B 014B HEX 0148 Solution Set a value within the range of 0 to 4 in CH1 Average processing setting Un G24 Error and Solution Display Format C DEC The error history is sequentially displayed From an old error The latest error is displayed at the bottom line Stop Monitor CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE CHAPTER 5 1 0SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE This chapter describes the CT input module I O signals assigned to the CPU module 5 1 I O Signal List The following shows the list of the CT input module I O signals The device numbers X Y in the following table show the case that the start I O number of
124. Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 Item Setting range CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 Un G105 Un G109 Un G113 Un G117 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 Un G104 Un G108 Un G112 Un G116 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 UnG99 Un G103 Un G107 Un G111 Un G115 CHO Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 Un G102 Un G106 Un G110 Un G114 32768 to 32767 4 Turnon then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Point Set the warning output setting as follows Process alarm upper upper limit value gt Process alarm upper lower limit value gt Process alarm lower upper limit value gt Process alarm lower lower limit value CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Rate alarm When a change rate of a digital output value is equal to or more than the rate alarm upper limit value s or that is equal to or less than the rate alarm lower limit value s an alert is output Rate alarm warning CH1 Digital output value Digital output 4 zn value peng gt Rate alarm i 1 i warning i i Time Change rate of detection digital output period value 96 EEE rc ETE alee AEN Lp Rate alarm limit Change of upper CH1 Digital value output
125. Process alarm upper limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH2 Process alarm lower limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value Processing when an alert occurs for CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value Read Input signal error detection flag Processing when CH1 Input signal error Turn on input signal error reset signal Output the error code in BCD Turn on Error clear request Turn off Error clear request CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 9 3 When Using the Module on the Remote I O Network This section describes the system configuration and program examples of when the CT input module is used on a remote I O network Point For details on the MELSECNET H remote I O network refer to the following 1 Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network 1 System configuration Remote master station Remote I O station Station No 0 Station No 1 QJ71LP21 25 XYO to XY1F QX10 X20 to X2F QY10 Y30 to Y3F CT input module X Y1000 to X Y100F QJ72LP25 25 Network No 1 2 Programming condition Digital output values are read in the following conditions Used channel CH1 to CH3 Input range Factory default range 0 to SAAC Digital conversion method in CH1 Sampling processing Digital conversion method in CH2 Count average processing 50 times Digital conversion method in CH3 Primary delay filter Time consta
126. R W O 94 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Address Address Default Read Write Set value decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 Cas ace 151 974 CH2 Input range setting 0000 R W O 152 98H CH3 Input range setting 0000 R W O 153 994 CH4 Input range setting 00004 R W O 154 9Ay CH5 Input range setting 0000 R W O 155 9By CH6 Input range setting 0000 R W O 156 9Cu CH7 Input range setting 0000 R W O 157 9Dy CH8 Input range setting 00004 R W O 158 9E o l i58 oF Mode switching setting 0 R W 160 A0g Dropout detection setting OOFFy R W O 161 Aly Dropout status flag 00004 R 162 A24 CH1 Dropout value 50 R W O 163 A34 CH2 Dropout value 50 R W O 164 A44 CH3 Dropout value 50 R W O 165 A54 CH4 Dropout value 50 R W O 166 A6h CH5 Dropout value 50 R W O 167 ATH CH6 Dropout value 50 R W O 168 A8u CH7 Dropout value 50 R W O 169 A94 CH8 Dropout value 50 R W O 170 AAy to to System area 201 C9 202 CAu CH1 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 203 CBH CH1 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 204 CCy CH2 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 205 CDy CH2 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 206 CEy CH3 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 207 CFy CH3 Factory default setting gain value 0 R W 208 DOW CH4 Factory default setting offset value 0 R W 209 D1y CH4 Factory
127. R W O 3 1087 43Fy CH6 Trigger setting value 0 R W O 3 1088 4404 CH7 Trigger setting value 0 R W O 1089 4414 CH8 Trigger setting value 0 R W O i 1090 4424 CH1 Head pointer 0 R 1091 4434 CH2 Head pointer 0 R 1092 4444 CH3 Head pointer 0 R 1093 4454 CH4 Head pointer 0 R 1094 4464 CH5 Head pointer 0 R 1095 4474 CH6 Head pointer 0 R 1096 4484 CH7 Head pointer 0 R 1097 4494 CH8 Head pointer 0 R 1098 44Ay CH1 Latest pointer 0 R 1099 44By CH2 Latest pointer 0 R 1100 44 CH3 Latest pointer 0 R 1101 44Dy CH4 Latest pointer 0 R 99 Set value Address Address Default Read Write Name 4 backup area decimal hexadecimal value 2 A 1102 44Eu CH5 Latest pointer 0 R 1103 44Fy CH6 Latest pointer 0 R 1104 4504 CH7 Latest pointer 0 R 1105 4514 CH8 Latest pointer 0 R 1106 4524 CH1 Number of logging data 0 R 1107 4534 CH2 Number of logging data 0 R 1108 4544 CH3 Number of logging data 0 R 1109 4554 CH4 Number of logging data 0 R 1110 4564 CH5 Number of logging data 0 R 1111 4574 CH6 Number of logging data 0 R 1112 4584 CH7 Number of logging data 0 R 1113 4594 CH8 Number of logging data 0 R 1114 45Au CH1 Trigger pointer 0 R 1115 45By CH2 Trigger pointer 0 R 1116
128. Rate alarm warning output setting TTroisadie TrDisable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable ee m warning detection is me fons fare ir ime ange ire Rate alarm upper limit value 0 0 fs 0 0 fs 0 0 9s 0 0 fs 0 0 fs 0 0 fs 0 0 js 0 0 s Rate alarm lower limit value 0 0 s 0 0 js 0 0 s 0 0 s 0 0 fs 0 0 js 0 0 s 0 0 s Input signal error detection Set about the input signal of digital conversion Input signal error detection setting 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Scaling function Set about the scaling of digital conversion Scaling enable disable setting 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Scaling upper limit value 0 0 0 0 0 o 0 Scaling lower limit value 0 o 0 0 0 o D 0 Set whether to Enable or Disable the output of digital value For each channel O Enable 1 Disable 2 Double click the item to change the setting and input the setting value Items to input from the pull down list Double click the item to set to display the pull down list Select the item Items to input from the text box Double click the item to set and input the setting value 3 For setting CH2 to CH8 follow the operation of the Step 2 146 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS Item Setting value Reference Basic setting Conversion enable disable setting eo Enable 1 Disable default value Page 37 Se
129. Set a value within the range of 0 to 4 in Averaging 330 outside the range of 0 to 4 j DE process setting Un G24 Un G25 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O In CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH8 Rate Set CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to 3401 alarm lower limit value Un G141 the lower limit is equal to or CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G141 so that greater than the upper limit the lower limit value is smaller than the upper limit The channel where the error has occurred fits in O value Set one of the following values in Sampling cycle setting Un G26 The value set in Sampling cycle setting Un G26 is outside the 10ms 8CH 0 350 range of 0 to 3 20ms 8CH 1 50ms 8CH 2 100ms 8CH 3 CHLI Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 is Set CHLI Peak current detection time Un G318 to outside the range of 10 to 10000ms Un G325 in the range of 10 to 10000ms 360 CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 is Set CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to less than sampling cycle ms Un G325 to a value equal to or more than sampling The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 cycle ms CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 is Fy Set CHLI Peak current detection value in the range of 370 outside the range of 0 to 11999 EN 0 to 11999ms The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Peak current detection count reset
130. UN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off 1 Tocheck the operation click the Caneel button to cancel the control start Online Module Change MELSOFT Application EF 2 Click the L button to leave the Online M ia nge is stoppi VAPEUR l M Module Change mode Y To the next page 216 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE From the previous page 4 3 Click the Monitor window button to close the System Connection Channel Lst Q mu Ld or Onine Module Change Ho ac na nin ore Operation to Selected Med ME 110 NetworkNo Master rant Address StatonNo PLC 1 Pont 0010 16Pont 0020 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor Device window C Device Name p eee a XO online Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory TM i Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Bat h atc Address F E p c B A 9 8 7 6 413 211 64 0000000000000000 FNNDOOEPOOOOEOOOG DE 5 Display the address of the prerecorded buffer 66 0 0 00000000000000 0 67 00 0 0 0 00 0 00 0000 0 0 0 memory area and select it Then click the button 4 To the next page wajsks Jeaujouy jnouuw UoNoUN4 UONEINBUON y Bulsp jes 2y SJEJaWEJEd pue p sn s auey sN e ueuM 6 0L 217 From the previous page 4 Modify Value Device L
131. W O 1057 4214 CH2 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 1058 4224 CH3 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 1059 4234 CH4 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 1060 4244 CH5 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 98 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Address Address Default Read Write Set value decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 Cas ace 1061 4254 CH6 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 1062 4264 CH7 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 1063 4274 CH8 Level trigger condition setting 0 R W O 1064 4284 CH1 Trigger data 54 R W O 1065 4294 CH2 Trigger data 55 R W O 1066 42A4 CH3 Trigger data 56 R W O 1067 42By CH4 Trigger data 57 R W Oo 1068 42Cy CH5 Trigger data 58 R W O 1069 42Dy CH6 Trigger data 59 R W O 1070 42Ey CH7 Trigger data 60 R W O 1071 42Fy CH8 Trigger data 61 R W O 1072 4304 Level data 0 0 R W O 1073 4314 Level data 1 0 R W O 1074 4324 Level data 2 0 R W O 1075 4334 Level data 3 0 R W O 1076 4344 Level data 4 0 R W O 1077 4354 Level data 5 0 R W O 1078 4364 Level data 6 0 R W O 1079 4374 Level data 7 0 R W O 1080 4384 Level data 8 0 R W O 1081 4394 Level data 9 0 R W O 1082 43Au CH1 Trigger setting value 0 R W O A 1083 43By CH2 Trigger setting value 0 R W O E 1084 43Cy CH3 Trigger setting value 0 R W O F 1085 43Dy CH4 Trigger setting value 0 R W O 3 1086 43Ey CH5 Trigger setting value 0
132. Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 12 Input signal error detection flag Un G49 Input signal status can be checked with this flag for each channel For details on the input signal error detection function refer to the following Input Signal Error Detection Function gt Page 44 Section 4 6 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to O 0 Normal 1 Input signal error a Input signal error detection flag Un1G49 status When a CT input value out of the input range is detected Input signal error detection flag Un G49 corresponding to each channel turns to Input signal error 1 When an error is detected in any channels in which the digital conversion or input signal error detection is enabled Input signal error detection signal XC turns on b Clearing Input signal error detection flag Un1G49 To clear Input signal error detection flag Un G49 turn on then off Error clear request YF when the CT input value is within the measurement range Input signal error detection flag UnXG49 is also cleared by turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 112 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 13 Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 The process alarm and rate alarm
133. a W I 2 Check where the latest data and the oldest data are stored The places can be checked in the following buffer memory areas CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 1037 Page 133 Section 6 2 43 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1105 37 Page 134 Section 6 2 44 Ex When data was collected 5001 times or more seem 1st data ILLU 2nd data i 3rd data E Ath data p PD EIN d 5th data Latest data E eee pet 6th data Oldest data i CHO Head pointer 6 i A 4999th data E SG 5000th data 68 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 3 Check the storage place of when the logging stopped in CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1121 When the logging stopped under the following conditions CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 1505 points Logging hold request At the 3500th data The hold place is determined as the 5th data v 1st data EE 2nd data 3rd data 4th data AE d 5th data Latest data n an Magra oles aata CHO Head pointer 6 i ES REN a a 3499th data E B Staates angg antenner 3500th data KE CHO Trigger pointer 3500 3501st data P 4999th data 5000th data uonoun4 Bui6601 ziv 69 9 Resuming the logging To resume the logging set OFF 0 to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 The logging resumes from the head of the logging data storage area At th
134. abel Buffer Memory Device Label VA Data Type eit T ON Switch ON OFF m Settable Range Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delete C 218 1000 H Set the prerecorded data to the buffer memory Turn User range write request YA from off to on to restore the offset gain setting value in the user range to the module After confirming that Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on turn off User range write request YA Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the digital conversion is performed properly 10 Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Error flag XF is off CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 5 Resuming operation Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change Operation 4 Target Module OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Module Change T Execution jo Address 0000 Click the button on the appeared Installation esee React window to resume control Module READY X0 Confirmation Status turns on v Module Control pue Module Installation Completion Restart m Status Guidance The controls s
135. al Communication Ethernet Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QJ72LP25 BR15 5 Connection Channel List m M e No Specification Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 PLC Type Detail CCIECont CCIEFld Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H System Image Remoteljo Phone Line Connection C24 CCIECon CCIEField Ethernet CC Link C24 NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting omoes cu i To the next page 206 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE From the previous page 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 9 Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor 1 Monitoring Donn window C vevicename Bun I s zi sl XO Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format Ba tch Address FIE DIcislal9ls 7 6 5 4 321110 ifotototolotofatorerorororoforore a 6 Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 7 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Y Disable 1 for all channels Device Label Buffer Memory 8 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Device Label Y9 va Data Type Bit on Switch ON OFF m Settable Range 9 Confirm that the digital conversion has stoppe
136. alue 300 Logging cycle setting value s 1 to 3600 default value 300 0 Update Cycle default value Logging cycle unit setting 1 ms 2 s 0 Digital Output Value Logging data setting 1 Scaling Value default value Logging points after trigger 1 to 5000 default value 2500 0 Disable default value Logging function Level tri diti tti 1 Above Page 60 gging evel trigger condition setting 2 Below Section 4 12 3 Pass Through Trigger data Trigger setting value 0104999 CH1 default value 54 CH2 default value 55 CH3 default value 56 CH4 default value 57 CH5 default value 58 CH6 default value 59 CH7 default value 60 CH8 default value 61 32768 to 32767 default value 0 148 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS 8 4 Auto Refresh This function transfers data in the buffer memory to specified devices Programming of reading writing data is unnecessary 1 Setting procedure Open the Auto_Refresh window 1 Start Auto Refresh Project window Intelligent Function Module gt gt Module Name Auto Refresh 2 Click the item to set and input the destination device for auto refresh 5 0000 Q68CT Auto Refresh Display Filter Display All v Item Transfer to CPU Conversion completed flag Digital output value Latest Error Code Maximum value Minimum value Scaling value Warning output flag Process alarm Warning output flag Rate alarm Input signal error
137. alue Mode Un G158 Un G159 Normal mode 0964 41444 Offset gain setting mode 41444 09644 Point When a value out of the setting range above is written the mode is not switched and only the operating condition is changed a Mode switching To perform the mode switching turn off then on Operating condition setting request Y9 b After the mode is switched When the mode is switched these areas are cleared and Operating condition setting completed flag X9 turns off After checking that Operating condition setting completed flag X9 is off turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 c Default value The default value is set to 0 22 Dropout detection setting Un G160 Set whether to enable or disable the dropout detection for each channel For details on the dropout function refer to the following Dropout Function gt Page 49 Section 4 8 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bo 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 cHsjonr CH6 ICH5 CH4 CH3ICH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enable 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 120 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 23 Dropout status flag Un G161 The setting status of the dropout function can be checked for each channel For details on the dropout f
138. an error occurs The error code 2060 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed Point Set the following buffer memory addresses in the trigger data CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 11 to 18 CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 54 to 61 Level data L1 Un G1072 to Un G1081 1072 to 1081 Buffer memory address with R in List of Buffer Memory Addresses For details on the buffer memory address refer to the following List of Buffer Memory Addresses 3 Page 91 Section 6 1 Do not set the buffer memory addresses with R W or W or system area in List of Buffer Memory Addresses If they are set the normal operation of the CT input module may not be ensured b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value Channel Default value Buffer memory to be monitored CH1 54 CH1 Scaling value Un G54 CH2 55 CH2 Scaling value Un G55 CH3 56 CH3 Scaling value Un G56 CH4 57 CH4 Scaling value Un G57 CH5 58 CH5 Scaling value Un G58 CH6 59 CH6 Scaling value Un G59 CH7 60 CH7 Scaling value Un G60 CH8 61 CH8 Scaling value Un G61 131 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 41 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 These are the areas for storing the data to be monitored when the level trigger of the logging function is used 10 types of data
139. an the update cycle of the logged 2020 logged value digital output value or scaling value Ta The channel where the error has occurred fits in O For the setting procedure of a logging cycle refer to the following Logging Function lt gt Page 60 Section 4 12 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un1G1031 is set to a Set Digital output value 0 or Scaling value 1 in 2030 value other than 0 and 1 nee CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un1G1031 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 is Set a value within the range of 1 to 5000 in CHO 204011 set to a value outside the range of 1 to 5000 e Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Set one of the following values in CHO Level trigger z condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 is Disable 0 Di 2050 set to a value outside the range of 0 to 3 Above 1 V The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 Below 2 w Pass through 3 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1071 is set to a value Seta value withinmitier ae GEO ETE 20601 outside the range of 0 to 4999 M m Trigger data Un G1064 to Un1G1071 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHLI Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is set to a Set OFF 0 or ON 1 In CHO Logging hold request 20
140. and minimum scaling values when the scaling function is enabled 5 Logging data A digital output value or scaling value is collected 35 4 2 Input Range Setting An input range can be selected for each channel depending on the CT to be connected Select a factory default range normally If the slope of I O conversion characteristics is changed select a user range and configure the offset gain setting Point Select an input range depending on the CT to be connected In case of excessive input safety problems such as heat generation may occur Ifa set input value is not supported by the CT to be connected and Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off an input signal error may occur If an input signal error occurs check if the input range setting is supported by the connected CT If the input range setting is incorrect reset the setting For details on the input signal error detection function refer to the following Input Signal Error Detection Function gt Page 44 Section 4 6 1 Setting procedure 1 Set values to CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 depending on the CT to be connected Input range Setting value 0 to SAAC 00004 0 to 50AAC 00014 0 to 100AAC 00024 Factory default range 0 to 200AAC 0003 0 to 400AAC 0004 0 to 600AAC 0005 0 to SAAC 00104 0 to 50AAC 00114 0 to 100AAC 00124 User range 0 to 200AAC 00134 0 to 400AAC
141. apacity may be insufficient Select the power supply capacity according to the module to be used If the power supply capacity is insufficient change the combination of the modules Applicable network 4 ppplicable base one module Number of modules Main base unit of remote Extension base unit of I O station remote I O station QJ72LP25 25 QJ72LP25G QJ72LP25GE Eee a E QJ72BR15 O Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the network module 2 Can be mounted to any I O slot of a base unit The Basic model QCPU or C Controller module cannot configure the MELSECNET H remote I O net 20 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 For multiple CPU system The function version of the first released CT input module is C and the CT input module supports multiple CPU systems When using the CT input module in a multiple CPU system refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System a Intelligent function module parameters Write intelligent function module parameters to only the control CPU of the CT input module 3 For online module change The CT input module supports online module change For details on online module change refer to the following ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 0 s Page 182 CHAPTER 10 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Developer s Page 253 Appendix 3 sways S ajqeolddy 7 21 4 Applicable software packages The follo
142. ata in all the channels are cleared Even if CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 and the logging resumes the logged data is not cleared 137 CHAPTER 7 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION This chapter describes the procedure prior to a CT input module operation the name of each part of a CT input module and wiring method 7 1 Handling Precautions This section describes the handling precautions for a CT input module Do not drop the module case or do not subject it to strong impact Do not remove the printed circuit board from the case Doing so can cause module failure Do not disassemble the module Doing so can cause module failure Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system operation Tighten the screws such as a module fixing screw within the specified torque range Undertightening the screws can cause short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screws and or module resulting in short circuit or malfunction Screw Tightening torque range Module fixing screw M3 screw 0 36 to 0 48N m Terminal block terminal screw M3 0 42 to 0
143. ating plate front part of the module or system monitor of the programming tool 1 Checking on the rating plate The rating plate is on the side of the CT input module ata MITSUBISHI Serial number first five digits Function version SERIAL 14011000000000 Relevant regulation standards MITSUBISHI MADE IN JAPAN 2 Checking on the front part bottom part of module The function version and serial number on the rating plate are also shown on the front part bottom part of the module I0 ele o o o o v I0 NIO oro oro ro oro NIO es 5 8 Function version Y veel a L U N eS 14011000000000 Jid 1 ET _ ee ee I E Serial number CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 Checking on the system monitor The function version and serial number can be checked on the Product Information List window Diagnostics gt System Monitor 5 gt Product Information List Product Information List Sort Order by Installation Order by Type Name lio Master Base Slot Type Series Model Name Point Address PLC Intelli Q Q68CT 16Point 0000 140110000000000 C Empty gt Serial No Ver Production Number 1 2 Empty 3 Empty 4 Empty 5 Empty 6 Empty 7 Empty Create CSV File
144. base ran Base JO Ade 0000 0010 0020 Main Base Information List Module Information List Main Base Extension Basel Extension Basez Extension Bases Extension Based Extension Bases Extension Bases Extension Base7 Power Base Installed Base Parameter 1O Network No Master Base m Base Model Nome Boner e Sots Status EET Series ModelNeme Pont man Heg me awe Power J 5 Power CPU Q QaPas2s cu Empty empty l Pont 0010 Empty Empty 16Point 0020 Online Module Change Operation Module Change Execution Installation Target Module I O Address 0000 Module Name Q68CT Confirmation Status xin Module Selection Completed Module Control Restart Status Guidance lease turn off Y signal of the changed module hen you change the intelligent Function module lease press next button when you are ready cm CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Open the System Monitor window O Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Click the button to enable a module change When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation described in gt Page 190 Section 10 5 3 MELSOFT Application 4 The target module didn t respond The task is a
145. ble setting Un GO for all channels Check that digital conversion is disabled by confirming Converting or unused 0 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 If the default setting registration function is used when digital conversion is in process in even one channel the error code 116 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on In this case the values in the buffer memory do not change back to the default 2 Corresponding buffer memory data and default values Buffer memory areas that correspond to this function are marked with O in the list of buffer memory addresses 03 Page 91 Section 6 1 the corresponding data are the same as those for the set value backup function Also the default values are listed in the same table 3 How to use 1 Set Disable 1 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channels 2 Turnon then off Operating condition setting request Y9 3 Turnon then off Default setting request Y5 This operation reads default values to the buffer memory 4 Change values in the buffer memory if necessary 5 Activate the set data by turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 For details on Default setting request Y5 refer to the following e Output signal 037 Page 89 Section 5 2 2 uonounJ uogejsiBes Bunes ynejad pL 73 4 15 Error History Function Errors and alarms that occurred in the CT input module are stored in the buffer
146. can be checked whether the alarm is the upper limit alarm or lower limit alarm for each channel For details on the warning output function refer to the following e Warning Output Function gt Page 53 Section 4 10 o a o A A o a 99 o kd N o a 3 o a o o oO o Co o I c o o Cc oc A o QD o S o d c o o E D o E o o o o o o o Warning output flag 25 5 25 25 25 eS sS eS 251 251 351 eS 28 28 28 25 Process alarm 2 a5 gt gt dic a2 dz zs 2x 2 d 23 x 18158 Un G50 IEIIE IE IE IEILIEILIE LIEIIE IET IE IEIIEIIEIIE EIE oslos5 jososjos jososlos jososlos jososlosiloslos o o o o o o o o o o o o fa Warning output flag 23 25 35 251 23 25 28 25 28 251 25 25 28 25 25 25 Rate alarm 38 25 IE 2E dm a2 a 2 2 2 d 22 22 3 gt 38 Un G51 IEIIEIIETIIEZIIE rIE IE IE IET Ig IE IIE IE IEIEIZ IE SBEISELSELSELSELSELSELSELSELSELSEILSEILSEISEISEISE 0 Normal 1 Alarm ON a Status of Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 and Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 When an alarm is detected due to any of the following Alarm ON 1 is stored in Warning output flag corresponding to each channel The digital output value exceeds the setting range of CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 The dig
147. ce The controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh For the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button Ges 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application E3 e LI Online module change completed WEe1601q eouenbes e Bulsn jes aly sjejeureideg pue pasn s eBues jnejeq AJojoe4 e ueuw 9 0L 199 10 7 WhenaUser Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using the Configuration Function with Another System 1 Stopping operation 1 Create anew project New Project XO Project gt New 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC Type and click the button PLC Series QCPU Q mode PLC Type Q372LP25 Q772BR 15 Remotel O v Language 3 Open the Transfer Setup window D Navigation window gt Connection Destination view gt Connection destination data name Connection Destination Gad i ME Current Connection All Connections ay Connection 4 Configure the settings to access the module on the Transfer Setup Connection x ms Tu remote I O station and click the CC IE Cont CC Link NET II NET 10 H Board Board Board button com cow Transmission Speed 115 2kbps E E E CCIEFeld CCIEFild CCIE Field MAC AGJQSTEL Bus G Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QI
148. channel for which Enable is set Conversion completed 1 is stored Conversion completed flag XE turns on when the digital conversion of all the channels for which Enable is set is completed When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off Converting or unused 0 which is the default setting is stored When the first digital conversion is completed Conversion completed 1 is stored again Ex When CH1 and CH2 are set to Enable and the conversion of CH1 and CH2 is completed 0003 3 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 as shown below b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO iojo ojo ojo ojo ojojojojo oj t CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 0 0 0 3 4 CHO Digital output value Un1G11 to Un G18 The digital output value after digital conversion is stored in each channel a Updating cycle When the average processing is performed the value is updated in each specified averaging process cycle When the average processing is not performed the value is updated in each sampling cycle 5 Latest error code Un1G19 The latest error code or alarm code detected by the CT input module is stored For details on the error code and alarm code refer to the following Error Code List 7 gt Page 228 Section 11 1 e Alarm Code List s Page 235 Section 11 2 a Clearing an error Turn on then off Error clear request YF 108 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 6 Offset ga
149. condition setting request Y9 _ Set 0964H to Mode switching setting 1 Un1G158 Set 4144H to Mode switching setting 2 Un G159 Turn on Operating condition J setting request Y9 Turn off Operating condition setting request Y9 d Switching the mode using the intelligent function module switch setting The programs other than the common program are not necessary CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING This chapter describes the programming procedure and basic programs for the CT input module 9 1 Programming Procedure Create a program to execute digital conversion according to the following procedure NO Use the configuration function Switch setting lt gt Page 158 Section 9 2 Page 167 Section 9 3 Switch setting parameter setting 3 Page 158 Section 9 2 Page 167 Section 9 3 Set by using a program lt gt Page 158 Section 9 2 Page 167 Section 9 3 Initial setting Y Input range setting program Conversion enable disable setting program Averaging process setting program Primary delay filter setting program Sampling cycle setting program Scaling function setting program Peak current detection function setting program Dropout function setting program Logging function program Input signal error detection function program Warning output function program 1 A pro
150. cription Setting value Drive Mode Set the operation mode of the CT input Normal Digital Conversion Mode Setting module Offset Gain Setting Mode 145 Dumes YAMS Z8 8 3 Parameter Setting Set the parameters for each channel Setting parameters on the screen omits the parameter setting in a program 1 Setting procedure Open the Parameter window 1 Start Parameter D Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Module name gt Parameter W 0000 Q68CT Parameter Display Filter Display All Zj Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CHS CH6 CH CHB Basic setting sion system Conversion enable disable nable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable k i z p ampling O Sampling 0 Sampling 0 Sampling 0 Sampling 0 Sampling 0 Sampling Pull down list type Averaging Process setts B R r Disable Pref essing Processing Processing Processing Processing Processing Processing Average time Average number of times Moving average Time 0 o o 0 0 o 0 constant settings Sampling cycle setting 0 10ms 8CH Warning output function Set about the warning of digital conversion Eres erm at Stu oxcnable L Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Libisable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Process alarm upper upper limit vae 0 0 0 0 0 0 Process alarm upper lower limit Text box type vaus gt D 0 o 0 0 o Process alarm lower upper limit ve 0 0 0 0 0 0 Process alarm lower lower limit conti 0 bu 0 o o
151. cription of the problem 16112 The G P OGSTOR instruction was executed in the offset gain Do not execute the G P OGSTOR instruction in the setting mode offset gain setting mode The G P OGSTOR instruction has been consecutively y r r Execute the G P OGSTOR instruction only once i i per module 162 For the offset gain setting a setting value has been y consecutively written to the non volatile memory more than Write Mme setting Value inte me nonvolatile E 25 times only once for each offset gain setting 231 Error code 1 Description and the error cause Action decimal 4 Execute the G P OGLOAD and G P OGSTOR The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed toward a instructions to the same module module different from the one on which the G P OGLOAD i R After executing the G P OGLOAD instruction on 163 instruction was executed t the module from where data is restored execute The G P OGSTOR instruction has been executed ahead of the G P OGSTOR instruction on the module to the G P OGLOAD instruction where the data is restored e The averaging time value set in CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Set the averaging time to a value in the range of 40 Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 40 to 5000ms to 5000ms 200 The averaging time value set in CHO Average time Av
152. ction 1 Process alarm When a digital output value enters the alert output range set in advance an alert is output When the scaling function is enabled scaling values are applied to the warning detection Alert output range Out of alert output range e Included Digital output value Alert Upper upper limit value Upper lower limit value N Alert cleared N Alert cleared CH1 digital output value Lower upper Alert cleared limit value CH2 digital output value Y Lower lower limit value CH1 Warning output flag Time OFF i Process alarm upper limit value Un G50 b0 CH1 Warning output flag ON Process alarm lower limit value OFF S Un G50 b1 gt CH2 Warning output flag ON a Process alarm upper limit value OFF 3 Un G50 b2 o c 3 amp Warning output signal X8 OFF T EE 3 2 a Operation of warning output If a digital output value enters the alert output range process alarm upper upper limit value or more or process alarm lower lower limit value or less an alert is output as follows Alarm ON 1 is stored in Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 Warning output signal X8 turns on The ALM LED turns on Alarm code 10ALI is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Alarm codes are stored as below 10A0 Fixed Process alarm channel number 0 Process alarm upper limit 1 Process alarm
153. ction 4 3 Averaging process setting Sampling Processing default value Time Average Count Average Moving Average Primary Delay Filter RwON O Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Time 40 to 5000ms default value 0 Average Count 4 to 500 Times default value 0 Average Moving 2 to 1000 Times default value 0 Average Primary 10 to 10000ms default value 0 Delay Filter Page 38 Section 4 5 Sampling cycle setting 0 10ms 8CH default value 1 20ms 8CH 2 50ms 8CH 3 100ms 8CH Page 37 Section 4 4 Warning output function Process alarm warning output setting 0 Enable 1 Disable default value Process alarm upper upper limit value Process alarm upper lower limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Process alarm lower upper limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Process alarm lower lower limit value 32768 to 32767 default value 0 Page 53 Section 4 10 1 Rate alarm warning output setting 0 Enable 1 Disable default value Rate alarm warning detection period 10 to 5000ms default value 0 Rate alarm upper limit value 3276 8 to 3276 7 s default value 0 Rate alarm lower limit value 3276 8 to 3276 7 s default value 0 Page 55 Section 4 10 Q Input signal error detection
154. d with Conversion completed flag Un G10 Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed wa skS Jeyjouy ym wes6oig souenbas e Buisn Jag aly suajeweled pue p sn s eBues sN e ueuM S OL Reflect to Input Column Delete C 207 2 Removing a module UO ee anen He ag S manm 2 Base Module Base Model Name Paramet P E EE eel D Cu o nares UPS 2 Major Error Moder D Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Online Module Change Operation Target Module Module Change 1 0 Address pooo Execution Installation Module Name React Confirmation Status Module Control hange Module Selection Completed Restart Status Guidance lease turn off signal of the changed module hen you change the intelligent Function module lease press next button when you are ready cast 208 Open the System Monitor window of the remote VO module OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Click the button to enable a module change When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation described in 7 gt Page 209 Section 10 8 3 MELSOFT Application The target module didn t respond The task is advanced t
155. d in 7 gt Page 203 Section 10 7 3 MELSOFT Application i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block Remove the module Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 202 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 3 Mounting a new module 1 Mount the removed module and new module to the other system 2 Using the G P OGLOAD instruction save the offset gain setting values in the user range from the removed module to the CPU device Refer to 3 Page 243 Appendix 1 2 for the G P OGLOAD instruction 3 Using the G P OGSTOR instruction restore the offset gain setting values in the user range to a new module Refer to gt Page 247 Appendix 1 3 for the G P OGSTOR instruction 4 Remove the new module from the other system mount it to the slot from where the old module was removed in the original system and install the terminal block 5 After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off Online Module Change Operation Target Module Module Change I O Address 0000 Execution g Installation Module Name Q68CT Confirmation Status Changing Module Module Control Restart Status
156. ddress o 10 20 System monitor 0j 1J 2 Online module change Powe Intell None None rsu Q25PHCPU gent pply T6pt 16pt 15pt Status Bl Module system ertor E Module error E Module warning Jemen B Module change Stop monitor Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H M Module name Q68CT Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Change module selection completed Status Guidance Please turn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Point P Open the Online module change window O Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Click the button to enable a module change 4 When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation described in 03 Page 265 Appendix 3 6 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block 6 Remove the module Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED wi
157. detection When CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 exceeds set CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 consecutively for the duration of set CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 an error is notified as follows Peak current detected 1 is stored in Peak current detection flag Un G301 Peak current detection signal X7 turns on The ALM LED flashes Alarm code 1200 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 Alarm codes are stored as below Fixed Peak current detection channel number However digital conversion on the channel where an error is notified was held poesis gt Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program Digital output value Peak current detection time Peak current detection value Time CH1 Peak current detection flag OFF 3 w OFF Un G301 b0 p i ON Peak current detection i signal X7 OFF gt Error clear request YF OFF 46 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2 Counting the peak current detection The number of peak current detection is stored in CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 When a peak current is detected 1 is added in CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 However next addition is not performed unless a digital output value falls below the peak current detection value once CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un
158. detection flag Dropout status flag Peak current detection flag Logging hold flag Reset completed for the number of peak current detections The number of peak current deterctinns Uusejes ony 7g The data of the buffer memory is transmitted to the specified device Point Available devices are X Y M L B T C ST D W R and ZR When a bit device X Y M L or B is used set a number that is divisible by 16 points example X10 Y120 M16 Data in the buffer memory are stored in 16 points of devices starting from the set device No Example When X10 is set the data are stored in X10 to X1F 149 8 5 Offset gain Setting When using a user range configure the offset gain setting with the following operations When using a factory default range the offset gain setting is not required The offset gain setting can be configured from the following two types of operations Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 Setting from a program 8 5 1 Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 1 Setting procedure Open the Offset Gain Setting window OD Tool gt gt Intelligent Function Module Tool gt Analog Module gt Offset Gain Setting 1 Select the module to configure the offset gain Module Selection Offset Gain Setting Module Selection setting and click the button MELSOFT Series GX Works2 2 Click the Yes button Normal setting mode will be switched o
159. detection flag Un G301 To clear Peak current detection flag Un G301 turn on then off Error clear request YF when the digital output value is the peak current detection value or less Peak current detection flag Un G301 is also cleared by turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 123 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 124 28 CHO Peak current detection count reset request Un G302 to Un G309 To set the number of peak current detection to 0 set Reset requested 1 for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following e Peak Current Detection Function 7 s Page 46 Section 4 7 Peak current detection count reset request Setting value Reset not requested 0 Reset requested 1 a Default value All channels are set to Reset not requested 0 29 CHO Peak current detection count reset complete Un G310 to Un G317 The number of peak current detection can be checked for completion for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following Peak Current Detection Function 7 gt Page 46 Section 4 7 When Reset requested 1 is set to CHO Peak current detection count reset request UnXG302 to Un G309 and Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 is reset Reset request completed 1 is stored in Peak current detection count reset complete Un G310 to Un G317 When Re
160. dvanced to the installation confirmation After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block Remove the module Point Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 189 uondun uoneunBiuo y BuISN JEG eJy SJSJSUIEJEd pue pas s SBuey nezog Asojoe4 e ueuM FOL 3 Mounting a new module Mount a new module in the same slot and install the Online Module Change terminal block After mounting the module click the Execute button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off 4 Checking operation Onlin e Module Change a 1 To check the operation click the Caneel button to cancel the control start MELSOFT Application bil 2 Click the Cx button to leave the Online e ve stop is LC side i Module Change mode Y To the next page 190 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE From the previous page 3 Click the button to close the System Image Stop Monitor een System Monitor window Parameter Jo NetworkNo Master e Pont Address StabonNo PLC Typ 0 o Power over CPU Q QVAFZS25 PU O1 my imply d Pont 0010 02 gt m y Empty d Pont OG20 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor
161. e System S 24 CH3 User range setting offset value System 5 25 CH3 User range setting gain value System S 26 CH4 User range setting offset value System S 27 CH4 User range setting gain value System S 28 CH5 User range setting offset value System 5 29 CH5 User range setting gain value System S 30 CH6 User range setting offset value System 5 31 CH6 User range setting gain value System 5 32 CH7 User range setting offset value System S 33 CH7 User range setting gain value System 248 APPENDICES Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by S 34 CH8 User range setting offset value System 5 35 CH8 User range setting gain value System 3 Functions This instruction restores the offset gain set values in a user range setting to the CT input module There are two interlock signals of G P OGSTOR a completion device D and a completion status indication device D 1 The accuracy on restoration of the offset gain setting values when the ambient temperature is 25 5 C is within 1 5 within 150 digit a Completion device The device turns on at the END processing for the scan where the G P OGSTOR instruction is completed and turns off at the next END processing b Completion status indication device This device turns on or off depending on the status of the G P
162. e Pass through Trigger data 3 Trigger occurrence 1 T gger Nu cM M oa ohana Se Siete NN le setting value Trigger occurrence 2 Time 63 8 Whena setting value other than Disable 0 is selected in CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 set a logging stop condition to CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1071 and CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1089 Item Description Setting range Set a buffer memory address monitored as an occurrence CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1071 0 to 4999 condition to stop logging CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1089 Seta value of the buffer memory to stop logging 32768 to 32767 1 By setting Level data O Un G1072 to Un1G1081 as a monitoring target a device value of a CPU module can be set as trigger data For details on the level data refer to the following Level data O 7 gt Page 132 Section 6 2 41 9 Turnon then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Point if CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 and the logging cycle set in CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 is shorter CHLI Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 and the conversion cycle of CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 the error error code 2020 occurs and the logging cannot be performed When the logging function turns invalid When any of the following error occurs after the
163. e power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual Do not directly touch any conductive parts and electronic components of the module Doing so can cause malfunction or failure of the module Wiring Precautions NWARNING After installation and wiring attach the included terminal cover to the module before turning it on for operation Failure to do so may result in electric shock NCAUTION Individually ground the FG terminal of the programmable controller with a ground resistance of 1000 or less Failure to do so may result in electric shock or malfunction Tighten the terminal screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause short circuit fire or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Prevent foreign matter such as dust or wire chips from entering the module Such foreign matter can cause a fire failure or malfunction A protective film is attached to the top of the module to prevent foreign matter such as wire chips from entering the module during wiring Do not remove the film during wiring Remove it for heat dissipation before system o
164. e ALM LED also b Turning off Peak current detection signal X7 Peak current detection signal X7 turns off by turning on then off Error clear request YF In addition Latest error code Un G19 is cleared and the ALM LED turns off Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program Peak current detection flag Un G301 0 Normal DXI Peak current detected a lt 0 Normal I d 1 1 ON OFF Peak current detection signal X7 OFF Error clear request YF 82 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE 5 Warning output signal X8 Warning output signal X8 turns on when the process alarm or rate alarm has been detected The process alarm and rate alarm can be detected only when the warning output function is enabled For details on the warning output function refer to the following e Warning Output Function 037 Page 53 Section 4 10 a Process alarm Warning output signal X8 turns on when a digital output value exceeds the set range for CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 The ALM LED also turns on along with the on of the signal Warning output signal X8 turns off when the digital output value falls within the setting range for all the digital conversion enabled channels The ALM LED also turns off b Rate alarm Warning output signal X8 turns on when a digita
165. e C 10 if the buffer memory data are not recorded follow Was S Jeaujouy jnoyym ure460Jg eouenbes e Husn 19S eJy sjejeueJeg pue pasn s uey Jes e ueuM OL OL the procedures 11 and 12 11 Compare the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un1G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un G233 with the values in Range Reference Table gt Page 227 Section 10 11 12 If the values are proper save the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un1G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un1G233 Point f the buffer memory values are improper compared to the reference table the offset gain values cannot be saved and restored Before resuming the control configure an offset gain setting according to the flowchart _ gt Page 153 Section 8 5 2 Note that if module control is resumed without offset gain setting being made operation will be performed with the default values Switch the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning on Operating condition setting request Y9 221 2 Removing a module Monitor Status Connection Channel List O mu REE Mode System Monitor Online Module Chenge M Eo sd oom 20102020 Operation to Seloctod Modulo Main Base Informal Base Module Base Model ame Parameter Jo Em Master Point Address Station Mo PLC Power CPU Q QUP2
166. e Data type Un Start I O number of the module 0 to FE BIN 16 bits Within the range Start number of the device where control data is stored of the specified Device name device Device which turns on for one scan at the processing completion of the dedicated Within the range instruction of the specified Bit In error completion D 1 also turns on device AVOTD0 d D Z xipueddy uononujsu pejeoipeq xipueddy 243 2 Control data Device Item Setting data Setting range Set by System area The status on instruction completion is stored 1 Completion status 0 normal completion System Other than 0 error completion error code 942 System area S43 System area 944 CH1 Factory default setting offset value System S45 CH1 Factory default setting gain value System 6 CH2 Factory default setting offset value System 7 CH2 Factory default setting gain value System 8 CH3 Factory default setting offset value System 9 CH3 Factory default setting gain value System 5 10 CH4 Factory default setting offset value System 941 CHA Factory default setting gain value System 5 12 CH5 Factory default setting offset value System 13 CH5 Factory default setting gain value System S14 CH6 Factory default
167. e G P OGSTOR instruction restore the offset gain setting values in the user range to a new module Refer to gt Page 247 Appendix 1 3 for the G P OGSTOR instruction Remove the new module from the other system mount it to the slot from where the old module was removed in the original system and install the terminal block After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off To check the operation click the button to cancel the control start 209 wa skS JSYJOUV yim wei6oig souenbes e Buisn 19S eJy s1ejeueJeg pue pas s Buey sasn e ueuM S OL From the previous page 4 MELSOFT Application E3 2 Click the ox button to leave the Online Module Change mode 3 Click the dose button to close the System Monitor window 4 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window 0000 0 DEC XD Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch ffololelstotelalo DDEEEIEE E 5 Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un G0 i To the next page 210 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE From the previous page i 6 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Modify Value Enable 0 for the channel used and turn on then off Device Label Buffer Memory Operating condition setting request Y9 Device Label 7 Monitor CHO Digital
168. e data is written to the non volatile memory at the timing when this signal is turned off then on For the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following e Offset gain setting mode flag XA gt Page 85 Section 5 2 1 7 b Normal mode 5 6 7 90 Turn on then off User range write request YA to perform the user range restoration For the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following e Offset gain setting mode flag XA gt Page 85 Section 5 2 1 7 Channel change request YB Turn on then off Channel change request YB to change a channel for which the offset gain setting is set For the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following e Channel change completed flag XB lt _ gt Page 86 Section 5 2 1 8 Maximum value minimum value reset request YD Turn on then off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD to clear the values of the following buffer memory areas CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 Un G38 Un G40 Un G42 Un G44 CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 Un G39 Un G41 Un G43 Un G45 For the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following e Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD 37 Page 88 Section 5 2 1 10 Error clear request YF To clear the following contents turn on then off Error clear request YF Peak current detection signal X7 Inpu
169. e online module change stops using GX Developer The RUN LED turns off I Conversion disabled Click the Eie button on x x x x GX Developer to enable the module to be removed Y Remove the module Y 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module Y The X Y refresh restarts and the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation starts Module READY X0 After mounting the module click x x x the e button on GX Works2 gt remains off O When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting parameters at this point P4 Po DD Check the operation before the control starts 2 D 2 n 4 Check the operation y x x Co Ww Click the __ca lt _ button on to GX Developer to turn off 9 the online mode 9 5 jo Y oz 39 a On Device test on GX Developer E test the operation of the module y O x x O co The module operates based o Oo Restore the user range settings on the test operation 9 S by writing of buffer memory io addresses at this point 2 o o o F 98 2 g mao Operation check is completed S E y ag as 5 Resume the control i Module READY X0 turns on F Restart the online module change Q using GX Developer The module operates based on O O O O c Y the initial setting sequence o Click the La button to resume Program which runs when the control Module READY X0 turns on O X 1 An access to Intelligent function mod
170. e operations common to Simple project and Structured project of GX Works2 GX Developer Version 8 Operating Manual lt SH 080373E 13JU41 gt Operating methods of GX Developer such as programming printing monitoring and debugging Memo CONTENTS SAEBIVMPREGAUI ONS FN IUD CIC WU IM 1 GONIDIITIONSIODIUSEIEORIILIEIBISODUGITEC A 4 INTRODUGHON REE NN i NR EN 5 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 0 020 e eee eee eee eee 5 RELEVANTIMANUA STR SEE EE NE NE VS ap E 6 MANUABPAGE ORGANZMION PN CE E 12 TERMS EEE E E S 15 PACKING ILIS TE epee A E cp A eae RO oy Re Cee M Re Ne 15 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 16 WA Beat res oer eec ee Ete t ed odes hd ee URS eda 17 CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 19 243 Applicable Systetis 9x hed fc sls da eos ecto I eae e eI Shes Wile Were ete 19 2 2 How to Check the Function Version and Serial Number siis eese een 24 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS 26 3 1 Gener l Specifications cessere Pv e a eo Se ee edie Me eS 26 3 2 Performance Specifications 00 tte eee 27 3 2 1 Performance specifications list llle 27 3 22 W O conversion characteristics s s eect ete ae 29 3 23 ACCUTACY ty saa Msn added tbe alah al Anite tt M Ms dh deed sur 31 3 24 Number of parameter settings 2 0 00 ccc cece eee eee 32 3 9 F nctlonlist Suede DUX TRUE Ro une ee rp gu dha ad a ace 33 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 35 4 4 Processing Each Function
171. e scaling function 115 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo seq Z 9 116 17 CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 Set the alert output range of the digital output value for each channel Configure the 4 step setting of process alarm upper upper limit value process alarm upper lower limit value process alarm lower upper limit value and process alarm lower lower limit value For details on the warning output function process alarm refer to the following e Warning Output Function Process Alarm lt s Page 53 Section 4 10 1 a Setting range Setting range 32768 to 32767 The setting must satisfy the following condition process alarm upper upper limit value gt process alarm upper lower limit value gt process alarm lower upper limit value gt process alarm lower lower limit value In the channel where the condition is not satisfied an error occurs The error code 6ALI is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The process alarm operates in the setting before the error occurs When using the scaling function set values considering the scale conversion For details on the scaling function refer to the following Scaling Function 1037 Page 50 Section 4 9 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0
172. e using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN This sequence program executes the following operations Switching the mode from the normal mode to the offset gain setting mode using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Switching the channels for which the offset gain settings are configured Writing the offset gain values to the CT input module Switching the mode from the offset gain setting mode back to the normal mode using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN Store the setting data of the M5 it MOV K1 D1 J dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 G OFFGAN UO D1 J Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN Mo Store the target channel number MOV H1 DO Jin DO i M10 Y9 x9 i UO 1 aya MOV H10 G150 Change the input range MI M2 XOA ua gt M MOV DO G22 Specify the offset target channel euam UO Set 0 for the gain target i channel i M2 M1 X0A UO i F i aya MOV DO G23 jSpecify the gain target channel 1 UO WM i MOV KO G2 O Set 0 for the offset target channel i M3 X0B i iy SET vo Turn on Channel change request i i YB i i X0B Turn off Channel change request RST YO YB M4 XOA Turn on User range write request Oo Oo SET YOA YA E O1 XOA i Q i 2 RST YOA Turn off User range write request oR TRE E EE RR EEE EEE REE ee M5
173. eck if the initial setting program is proper satisfying the following Normal system configuration uuejs s 18ujoue UM wei6oid eouenbes e Buisn peunBijuoo eje sBumes jeu pue pesn si ue Jasn e USYM 9 xipueddy The sequence program should set the initial setting on the leading edge of Module READY X0 of the CT input module Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after RUN In this case the initial setting is not set When used on remote I O network Insert a user device where the initial setting will be set at any timing initial setting request signal into the sequence program 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy euuo e xipueddy Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network In this case the initial setting is not set 267 5 Resuming operation 1 Open the Online module change window again 2 Click the Execution button on the appeared window to resume control Module READY X0 Online module change turns on 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT series GX Developer x d 268 APPENDICES Appendix 3 7 When a user range is used and initial settings are configured using a sequence program without another system 1 Stopping operation 1 Open the Device test window Device test Bit device Device Close D
174. ek 1815 7174 to to System area 1819 71By 1820 71Cy to to No 2 Same as No 1 1829 7254 1830 7264 to to No 3 Same as No 1 1839 72Fy 1840 7304 to to No 4 Same as No 1 1849 7394 1850 73Ay to to No 5 Same as No 1 1859 7434 1860 7444 to to No 6 Same as No 1 1869 74Dy 1870 74Ey to to No 7 Same as No 1 1879 7574 1880 7584 to to No 8 Same as No 1 1889 7614 1890 7624 to to No 9 Same as No 1 1899 76By 103 sesseJppy Asoweyy yng JO ISIT L 9 Set value Address Address Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 siis area 1900 76Cy to to No 10 Same as No 1 1909 7754 1910 7764 to to No 11 Same as No 1 1919 TTFy 1920 7804 to to No 12 Same as No 1 1929 7894 1930 78Ay to to No 13 Same as No 1 1939 7934 1940 7944 to to No 14 Same as No 1 1949 79Du 1950 79Eh to to No 15 Same as No 1 1959 7A7u 1960 7A8j to to No 16 Same as No 1 1969 7B1y 1970 7B2y to to System area 4999 13874 104 1 Default value set at factory shipment 2 This shows whether read or write from sequence program is possible R Readable W Writable 3 This shows that whether write to the non volatile memory by the set value backup function and read by the default setting registration function is possible O Writable and readable For details on the set value backup function refer to 3 Page 72 Secti
175. el The difference between the buffer memory address where the oldest data is stored and the start address in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function 03 Page 60 Section 4 12 Ex When the value of CH2 Head pointer Un G1091 is 3551 CH2 Logging data Un G10000 Latest data gt Un G13550 Un G13551 lt Oldest data 13550 10000 3550 Un G14999 Point The oldest data is stored in the start address of CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un1G44999 while the first 5000 data is logged from when the logging is started Therefore the value in CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 is fixed to 0 After the 5001st data the place of CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 moves one by one When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 is cleared sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 133 44 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un1G1105 The buffer memory address where the latest data is stored can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 for each channel The difference between the buffer memory address where the latest data is stored and the start address in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function gt Page 60 Secti
176. elligent function module 1 Device for user Device Description D1000 to D1326 Device for initial value setting D2010 Conversion completed flag D2011 D11 CH1 Digital output value D2012 D12 CH2 Digital output value D2013 D13 CH3 Digital output value D2019 Latest error code D2049 Input signal error detection flag D2050 Warning output flag Process alarm D2051 Warning output flag Rate alarm D2301 Peak current detection flag M10 to M25 Warning output flag Process alarm M30 to M45 Warning output flag Rate alarm M50 to M57 Input signal error detection flag M70 to M77 Peak current detection flag M100 Master station status check flag M101 Initial setting start trigger M102 Initial setting start flag M103 During initial setting flag M104 Initial setting completed flag 2 2 M200 to M219 as UE M300 M301 gs aa M310 M311 S9 Z P REMTO and Z P REMFR instructions completion result device oa M320 M321 xo oO M330 M331 z oo M340 M341 z2 o X1000 Module READY 3 9 X1009 Operating condition setting completed flag 2 F o X100C Input signal error detection signal 3 5x CT input module os X100E Conversion completed flag 92 X Y1000 to X Y100F a X100F Error flag 36 ez A un A D Y1009 Operating condition setting request d 2 Y100F Error clear request E 2 FX X20 Digital output value read command input signal 2 X2
177. en off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Scaling value 1 37 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 Set the cycle of storing the logging data for each channel Set a value for one cycle in CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G10339 Set a unit of one cycle in CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 1037 Page 60 Section 4 12 a Setting range The setting range of CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 depends on the setting for CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un1G 1047 Logging cycle Setting value of CHO Logging cycle Setting range of CHO Logging cycle unit unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 Update cycle 0 The setting is ignored ms 1 10 to 32767 S 2 1 to 3600 If a setting above is outside the setting range an error occurs The error code 2010 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed If the set logging cycle is shorter than the update cycle of the data to be logged an error occurs The error code 20201 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed When Disable
178. er CPU Redundant CPU Up to 53 x O Q25PRHCPU Q00UJCPU Up to 16 QOOUCPU Q01UCPU Q02UCPU Up to 36 Q03UDCPU Q04UDHCPU O O QO6UDHCPU Q10UDHCPU Upto 64 Q13UDHCPU Q20UDHCPU Q26UDHCPU High Performance model QCPU suieis g ejqeouddy 7 Up to 24 Universal model QCPU 19 Applicable CPU module CPU type CPU model Number of modules Applicable base unit Main base unit Extension base unit Programmable controller CPU Universal model QCPU QOSUDECPU Q04UDEHCPU QO6UDEHCPU Q10UDEHCPU Q13UDEHCPU Q20UDEHCPU Up to 64 Q26UDEHCPU Q50UDEHCPU Q100UDEHCPU QS001CPU N A x x 3 QO6CCPU V QO6CCPU V B Q12DCCPU V Safety CPU C Controller module Up to 64 O O O Applicable x N A 1 Limited within the range of I O points for the CPU module 12 Can be mounted to any I O slot of a base unit 3 Connection of an extension base unit is not available with any safety CPU To use a C Controller module with the CT input module refer to the C Controller Module User s Manual b When mounted on MELSECNET H remote I O station The following table lists the network modules and base units applicable to the CT input module and the number of mountable CT input modules Depending on the combination with other modules or the number of mounted modules power supply c
179. er detection time is stored in the following buffer memory areas Channel Address for trigger detection time CH1 CH1 Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1157 CH2 CH2 Trigger detection time Un G1158 to Un G1161 CH3 CH3 Trigger detection time Un G1162 to Un G 1165 CH4 CHA Trigger detection time UnXG1166 to Un G 1169 CH5 CH5 Trigger detection time Un G1170 to Un G 1173 CH6 CH6 Trigger detection time Un G1174 to Un G 1177 CH7 CH7 Trigger detection time Un G1178 to Un G 1181 CH8 CH8 Trigger detection time Un G1182 to Un G 1185 Ex For CH1 Trigger detection time Un G1154 to UnG1157 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1154 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1155 Month Day Un G1156 Hour Minute Un G1157 Second Day of the week CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Storage Item Stored data example First two digits of the year Last two digits of the 20114 year Month Day Stored in BCD code 3294 Hour Minute 1035 Second 404 The value that corresponds to the day of the week is stored in BCD code Sunday 00 Monday 01 Day of the week Tuesday 02 Wednesday 03 024 Thursday 04 Friday 05 Saturday 06 1 Those are values when a hold trigger was detected at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 8 Checking logging data Logging data are stored in the
180. erage er Set the averaging time to a value equal to or more number of times Moving average Time constant settings than 4 x sampling cycle ms Un G1 to Un G8 is less than 4 x sampling cycle ms The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 The averaging count value set in CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Set the averaging count to a value in the range of 4 to oH Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 4 to 500 500 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O The moving average count value set in CHO Average E time Average number of times Moving average Time constant Set the moving average count to a value in the range settings Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 2 to 1000 of 2 to 1000 The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 e The time constant value set in CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings s Set the time constant to a value in the range of 10 Un G1 to Un G8 is outside the range of 10 to 10000ms io 10000me 32001 The time constant value set in CHO Average time Average DR Set the time constant to a value equal to or more number of times Moving average Time constant settings than sampling cycle ms Un G1 to Un G8 is less than sampling cycle ms The channel where the error has occurred fits in L1 Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 is set to a value SEN d i
181. erence between the address of buffer memory which stores the data of when a hold trigger was executed and the start address in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 is stored For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function lt 37 Page 60 Section 4 12 Ex When the value of CH2 Trigger pointer Un G1115 is 3550 CH2 Logging data Un G10000 Un G13550 lt Data of when a trigger was executed 13550 10000 3550 Un G14999 Point When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G 1121 is cleared 47 CHLI Logging cycle monitoring value Un G1122 to Un G1145 These are the areas for storing the actual logging cycle for each channel The actual logging cycle is calculated from the update cycle of data to be logged When Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off the logging cycle is stored in CHO Logging cycle monitoring value Un G1122 to Un G1145 in the corresponding channel where the logging function is enabled For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function 37 Page 60 Section 4 12 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 b15 to bO Un G1122 s Un G1123 ms Un G1124 us Ex When the calculated value of logging cycle in CH1 is 6960ms Buffer memory address Stored value Un G1122 6 s Un G1123 960 ms
182. erm before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or that admitted not to be so by the user
183. ersion characteristics Practical input range 12000 10000 Digital output value ares NN Neg 0 Og 83 39 2 go 0 50 100 200 400 600 S og 3 go v o CT input value A 25 95 o o o t 4 Maximum No Input range setting Offset value Gain value Digital output value resolution 1 0 to 5AAC 0A 5A 0 5mA 2 0 to 50AAC 0A 50A 5mA 3 0 to 100AAC 0A 100A 10mA 0 to 10000 4 0 to 200AAC 0A 200A 20mA 5 0 to 400AAC 0A 400A 40mA 6 0 to 600AAC 0A 600A 60mA A If an analog value is input exceeding the digital output range the digital output value is fixed to the maximum 12000 or minimum 0 29 30 Point Use the CT input module so that the input and output are within the specified practical ranges If a value is out of the range the maximum resolution and accuracy may not fall within the range described in performance specifications Avoid values on the dotted line region in the graph of I O conversion characteristics For each input range avoid inputting a value that exceeds the one in the following table to the CT Avoid inputting the value that is 150 or more over the maximum input range Elements may be damaged Input range setting CT input value primary current value of a CT 0 to SAAC 7 5A or more 0 to SOAAC 75A or more 0 to 100AAC 150A or more 0
184. ess Default Read Write i E Name 4 backup area decimal hexadecimal value 2 E 1182 49E First two digits Last two digits 0 R of the year of the year 1183 49Fy CH8 Trigger Month Day 0 detection time 1184 4A0y Hour Minute 0 1185 4A1y Second Day of the week 0 1186 4A2u to to System area 1799 7074 102 1 Default value set at factory shipment 2 This shows whether read or write from sequence program is possible R Readable W Writable 8 This shows that whether write to the non volatile memory by the set value backup function and read by the default setting registration function is possible O Writable and readable For details on the set value backup function refer to 3 Page 72 Section 4 13 Unwritable and unreadable For details on the default setting registration function refer to 3 Page 73 Section 4 14 2 Un G1800 to Un G4999 Error history CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY Address Address Default Read Write PA ales decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 ee gica 1800 708y Latest address of error history 0 R 1801 7094 to to System area 1809 7114 1810 7124 Error code 0 R First two Last two 1811 7134 digits of the digits of the 0 R m year year 1812 7144 Error time Month Day 0 1813 7154 No 1 Hour Minute 0 1814 7164 Secona Pay ofthe 0 R z we
185. etection Function 1037 Page 46 Section 4 7 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bo 0 0 0 0 O O O 0 ICH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enable 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 27 Peak current detection flag Un G301 The peak current status can be checked with this flag for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following Peak Current Detection Function 1037 Page 46 Section 4 7 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO O O OJOJ O JO O O CH8CH7 CH6 CH5 CHA CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Normal 1 Peak current detected a Peak current detection flag Un G301 status When CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 exceeds set CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 consecutively for the duration of CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 set in advance Peak current detected 1 is stored in Peak current detection flag Un G301 of the corresponding channel When a peak current is detected in even one of the channels for which the digital conversion or peak current detection are enabled Peak current detection signal X7 turns on b Clearing Peak current
186. etting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 1000 ms 31 CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 Set the digital output value detected as peak current for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following Peak Current Detection Function 173 Page 46 Section 4 7 a Setting range Setting range 0 to 11999 When Disable 1 is set to Peak current detection setting Un G300 the setting of CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 is ignored b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0 Point Since 0 is set as the default value change the set value to use the peak current detection function 125 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jeyng Jo sjieleq Z 9 32 CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 These are the areas for storing the number of peak current detection for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following Peak Current Detection Function 03 Page 46 Section 4 7 a Counting the number of peak current detection When a digital output value exceeds set CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 consecutively for the duration of CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 set
187. etting blank will not cause an error to occur Base setting Item Description Type Select Intelli Model name Enter the model name of the module Points Select 16points StartXY Enter a desired start I O number of the CT input module 251 Jedoje eq x9 Jo uogejedo 7 xipueddy Jedoje eqg x9 Buisn ueuM zZ xipueddy 252 2 Intelligent function module switch setting Configure the setting on Switch setting in PLC parameter OD Parameter gt PLC parameter gt I O assignment gt Click the Switch setting button Switch setting for I O and intelligent function module Input format HEX _ lt Select HEX Model name Switch Switch 2 Switch 3 Switch 4 Switch 5 4 Q68CT 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 Item Setting range Switch 1 0 Fixed blank Switch 2 0 Fixed blank 4 Switch 3 0 Fixed blank 4 OL t 1 Switch 4 Fixed to 000H OH Normal digital conversion processing mode 1H to FH A value other than 0H Offset gain setting mode Switch 5 0 Fixed 1 When a value is set the set value is ignored 2 The operation is the same for all values in the setting range APPENDICES Appendix 3 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Developer This appendix describes the online module change procedure using GX
188. eveloper create a sequence program for initial settings and auto refresh setting 22 5 Products prepared by user CHAPTER 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION a CT Manufacturer Model name Input range Secondary winding CTF 5A 0 to 5AAC 3000 turns CTF 50A 0 to 50AAC 3000 turns Multi Measuring Instruments CTF 100A 0 to 100AAC 3000 turns Sales Co Ltd CTF 200A 0 to 200AAC 3000 turns CTF 400A 0 to 400AAC 6000 turns CTF 600A 0 to 600AAC 9000 turns CTL 10 3FC 0 to SAAC 0 to 50AAC 3000 turns CTL 16 3FC 0 to 100AAC 3000 turns U R D LTD CTL 24 3FC 0 to 200AAC 3000 turns CTL 36 6SC 0 to 400AAC 6000 turns CTT 36 9SC 0 to 600AAC 9000 turns EMU CT50 0 to 50AAC 3000 turns EMU CT100 0 to 100AAC 3000 turns Mitsubishi Electric Corporation TET DIe A00AAC 00 EMU CT600 0 to 600AAC 9000 turns 1 The following connection cable is available for a connection with the CT input module Manufacturer Model name U R D LTD CABLE 4 b Connection cable Use a shielded twisted pair cable for a connection between the CT input module and CT The shielded twisted pair cable must satisfy the input specifications described in the performance specifications Performance Specifications 7 7 Page 27 Section 3 2 23 suieis g ajqeolddy 7 2 2 How to Check the Function Version and Serial Number 24 The function version and serial number of a CT input module can be checked on the r
189. fset specification 0000 R W 23 174 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification 00004 R W 24 184 Averaging process setting CH1 to CH4 0000 R W O 25 194 Averaging process setting CH5 to CH8 0000 R W O 26 1Ay Sampling cycle setting 0000 R W O 27 1By to to System area 29 1D 30 184 CH1 Maximum value 0 R 31 1F4 CH1 Minimum value 0 R 32 204 CH2 Maximum value 0 R 33 214 CH2 Minimum value 0 R 34 224 CH3 Maximum value 0 R 35 23H CH3 Minimum value 0 R 36 244 CH4 Maximum value 0 R 37 254 CH4 Minimum value 0 R 38 264 CH5 Maximum value 0 R 39 274 CH5 Minimum value 0 R m 40 284 CH6 Maximum value 0 R 41 294 CH6 Minimum value 0 R 42 2A CH7 Maximum value 0 R 43 2By CH7 Minimum value 0 R 44 2Cy CH8 Maximum value 0 R 45 2Dy CH8 Minimum value 0 R _ 46 2Ey System area m 47 2Fy Input signal error detection setting 00FF4 R W O 48 304 Warning output setting FFFFy R W O 49 314 Input signal error detection flag 00004 50 324 Warning output flag Process alarm 00004 zn 51 33H Warning output flag Rate alarm 00004 52 344 System area 53 35H Scaling enable disable setting OOFFy R W O 54 364 CH1 Scaling value 0 R 55 374 CH2 Scaling value 0 R m 56 384 CH3 Scaling value 0 R 57 394 CH4 Scaling value 0 R 58 3Ay CH5 Scaling value 0 R 92 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY
190. functions programming and troubleshooting of the Q68CT current transformer input module hereafter abbreviated as CT input module Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals carefully and develop familiarity with the functions and performance of the MELSEC Q series programmable controller to handle the product correctly When applying the program examples introduced in this manual to an actual system ensure the applicability and confirm that it will not cause system control problems Relevant module Q68CT Unless otherwise specified this manual describes the program examples in which the I O numbers of X Y00 to X YOF are assigned for a CT input module For I O number assignment refer to the following manuals 1 QnUCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals I Qn H QnPH OnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Operating procedures are explained using GX Works2 When using GX Developer refer to the following When using GX Developer X 3 Page 251 Appendix 2 COMPLIANCE WITH EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVES 1 Method of ensuring compliance To ensure that Mitsubishi programmable controllers maintain EMC and Low Voltage Directives when incorporated into other machinery or equipment certain measures may be necessary Please refer to one of the following manuals QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Safety G
191. g Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 2500 39 CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 When the level trigger is used with the logging function set the occurrence condition of the hold trigger for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 037 Page 60 Section 4 12 Setting Setting value Disable 0 Above 1 Below 2 Pass through 3 In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2050 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed When Disable 1 is set to CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 the setting for CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 is ignored a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 0 130 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 40 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1071 Set a buffer memory address monitored for the occurrence condition of level trigger For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function 037 Page 60 Section 4 12 a Setting range Setting range 0 to 4999 In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set
192. g is as follows in case of the settings below Item Setting Sampling cycle 50ms 8CH Set time 380ms 380 50 7 6 times Figures after the decimal point are omit Conversion is processed seven times to output the average value Point The valid lower limit setting value for a time average is calculated as Minimum 4 times x Sampling cycle Ex When the sampling cycle is 50ms 8CH 4 x 50 200ms If the number of processing is less than four due to the set time the error error code 200 occurs and the digital output value becomes O0 b Count average Digital conversion is performed the set number of times and a sum of the converted values except the maximum and minimum values is averaged The averaged value is stored in the buffer memory The processing time that takes to store the averaged value of count average in the buffer memory varies depending on the sampling cycle Processing time Set number of times X Sampling cycle Ex The processing time is as follows in case of the settings below Item Setting Sampling cycle 50ms 8CH Set number of times 20 times 20 x 50 1000 ms The averaged value is output in each 1000ms Point Since the count average requires a sum of at least two digital conversions besides the maximum and minimum values the set number of times must be four or more 39 SPOYJSW UOISJSAUOD ejI ip Jo SuonesedO S pouje
193. gnal as an output signal from the CPU module to the intelligent function module Doing so may cause malfunction of the programmable controller system NCAUTION Do not install the control lines or communication cables together with the main circuit lines or power cables Failure to do so may result in malfunction due to noise Installation Precautions NCAUTION Use the programmable controller in an environment that meets the general specifications in the user s manual for the CPU module used Failure to do so may result in electric shock fire malfunction or damage to or deterioration of the product To mount the module while pressing the module mounting lever located in the lower part of the module fully insert the module fixing projection s into the hole s in the base unit and press the module until it snaps into place Incorrect interconnection may cause malfunction failure or drop of the module When using the programmable controller in an environment of frequent vibrations fix the module with a screw Tighten the screws within the specified torque range Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may result in damage to the product A module can be replaced online whil
194. gram that is created according to the function to be used eujnpeooJg Buruuej6oJg L6 Program to read a digital output value scaling value warning output flag input signal error detection flag and peak current detection flag v 2 A program that is added according to the Error reset program control target Create a program if needed i 157 9 2 When Using the Module in a Standard System Configuration This section introduces program examples where the following system configuration and conditions apply 1 System configuration QY10 Y20 to Y2F QX10 X10 to X1F CT input module X YO to X YF 2 Programming condition Digital output values are read in the following conditions Used channel CH1 to CH3 Input range Factory default range 0 to SAAC Digital conversion method in CH1 Sampling processing Digital conversion method in CH2 Count average processing 50 times Digital conversion method in CH3 Primary delay filter Time constant 100ms If an error occurs in the module an error code is displayed in BCD notation 3 Switch setting Set the operation mode x Project window Intelligent Function Module gt gt Q68CT gt Switch Setting Switch Setting 0000 Q68CT Drive Mode Setting Mormal Digital Conversion Mode v This dialog setting is linked to the Switch Setting of the PLC parameter Default value will be shown in the dialog if the Switch Setting of the
195. he LED is off 00014 Indicates that the LED is on 2 ERR LED Alternating indication of 00004 and 0001 Indicates that the LED is flashing When the CT input module in communication the LED status is displayed on GX 3 ALM LED Works2 The values0000 and 0001 are not always displayed evenly 2 Hardware switch information The setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting is displayed For details on the setting status refer to the following e Switch Setting 137 Page 145 Section 8 2 Item Intelligent function module switch Switch1 Switch2 Switch3 MODE Switch4 Switch5 HIW Information Monitor Status Module 1 Product ESH PEE Model Name Q68CT Information 1401 10000000000 C Display Format pex H W LED Information H W SW Information Item Value Item Value 1 RUN 0001 2 ERR 0000 3 JONUON UJ9 S S ZSHIOM X9 uo sniejs ainpoyy 1nduj 15 94 BUDOYO VIL Stop Monitor 239 APPENDICES Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction 1 Dedicated instruction The following table lists dedicated instructions that can be used in a CT input module Instruction Description G P OFFGAN This instruction switches the operation mode to the offset gain setting mode This instruction switches the operation mode to the normal mode G P OGLOAD This instruction reads out the offset gain set values in a user range setting
196. he logging operation Page 70 Section 4 12 9 Point Logging data can also be checked without stopping logging For details refer to the following To check logging data without stopping logging X gt Page 71 Section 4 12 10 uonoun4 Bui6601 Zy v 61 3 Setting procedure Follow the procedure below 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set Enable 0 to CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 3 Set the type of data to be logged to CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 Item Setting value Digital output value 0 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 Scaling value 1 ing valu 4 Setthe cycle in which logging data are stored to CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 5 Set the unit of the logging cycle in CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un1G1047 Logging cycle Setting value of CHO Logging cycle Setting range of CHO Logging cycle unit unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 Update cycle 0 The value is ignored ms 1 10 to 32767 S 2 1 to 3600 The actual logging cycle is an integral multiple of the conversion cycle for each conversion method The following table lists the conversion cycle for each conversion method Conversion Conversion cycle method Sampling Sampling cycle processing pang Ey Time set to CHO Average ti
197. in advance 1 is added to CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un G341 However after the addition to the peak current detection count 1 is not added unless the digital output value becomes less than the peak current detection value The number of peak current detection is stored automatically in the non volatile memory in the CT input module The number of peak current detection continues to be counted until the reset of the number of the detection b Resetting the number of peak current detection By setting Reset requested 1 to CHO Peak current detection count reset request Un G302 to Un G309 0 is stored in CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to Un1G341 c Measurement range of the number of peak current detection Measurement range 0 to 32767 When the upper limit of the measurement range is exceeded 0 is set again 33 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 Set whether to enable or disable the logging function for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 037 Page 60 Section 4 12 Logging enable disable setting Setting value Enable 0 Disable 1 In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2000 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setti
198. in setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Specify the channel to adjust the offset gain setting Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 channel to adjust the offset Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 channel to adjust the gain b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 0 0 101010100 0 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 0101010101010 0 ICH8 CH7 ICH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Not specified 1 Specified channel a Default value All channels are set to Not specified 0 Point Multiple channels can be simultaneously set In that case set Not specified 0 to either of Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 and Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 When the settings for both of them are configured at the same time the offset gain setting mode error error code 500 occurs f the user range is not used in CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 when the offset gain setting is set the error error code 51L1 occurs For details on the offset gain setting refer to the following Offset gain Setting gt Page 150 Section 8 5 109 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo seq Z 9 7 Averag
199. ing GX Developer cis ies imm meme 253 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 84 Operating condition setting request Y9 89 P Parameter setting 200000000 146 Peak current detection flag Un G301 123 Peak current detection function 46 Peak current detection setting Un G300 123 Peak current detection signal X7 82 R Range reference table 000 0 eee 227 S Sampling cycle setting UnG26 110 Sampling cycle switching function 37 Scaling enable disable setting UnG53 114 Scaling function 2 0 es 50 Scaling Value 2 ee ov bee Ys 35 Set value backup completed flag X6 81 Set value backup function 000 72 Set value backup request Y6 200 89 Switch setting 0 0 llle 145 T Time v rage aa Sed achat aee ete tees 39 U User range write request YA 90 Ww Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 113 Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 113 Warning output function 53 Warning output setting Un G48 112 Warning output signal X8 83 217 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print date March 2012 SH NA 081033ENG A First edition 44 edition Japanese manual version SH 081032 A This manual confers no
200. ing process setting Un G24 Un G25 Set these areas when selecting sampling or averaging processing for each channel Averaging processing includes time average count average moving average and primary delay filter For details on the digital conversion method refer to the following e Digital Conversion Method gt Page 38 Section 4 5 i b15 to b12 b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO Averaging process setting CH1 to CH4 Un G24 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Averaging process setting CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH5 to CH8 Un G25 Digital conversion method Setting value Sampling processing OH Time average 1H Count average 24 Moving average 3H Primary delay filter 44 When the value out of the setting range above is written in a channel an error occurs in the channel The error code 330 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The conversion processing is performed based on the setting before the error occurs a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Sampling processing 0 8 Sampling cycle setting Un G26 Set the sampling cycle shared by all the channels For details on the sampling cycle switching function refer to the following e Sampling Cycle Switching Function gt Page 37 Section 4 4 Sampling cycle Setting value 10ms 8CH Ou 20ms 8CH
201. ing request Y9 performed Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 and check if digital output values are stored in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 If the values are stored properly review the sequence program so that Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on in the program Is the set value correct when an averaging process is specified When time average is selected satisfy the following condition Set value gt 4 times x Sampling cycle If the condition above is not satisfied 0 is stored in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 Point If digital output values cannot be read even after taking the above actions the module might fail Please consult a local Mitsubishi representative 237 Seusej JO uo suuni 37 WIV eur ueuM EE LL Bunoouse qnoj E LL 11 3 5 When Conversion completed flag does not turn on in the normal mode Check item Action Is there any input signal error Check Input signal error detection flag Un G49 238 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 4 Checking the CT Input Module Status on GX Works2 System Monitor To check the LED status or the setting status of the intelligent function module switch setting select the H W information of the CT input module on the system monitor of GX Works2 1 Hardware LED information The LED status is displayed No LED name Status 1 RUN LED 0000 Indicates that t
202. iq a qeuy UOISJEAUO Ey 37 4 5 Digital Conversion Method One of the following digital conversion methods can be set for each channel Sampling processing Averaging process Primary delay filter For the operation of each digital conversion method refer to the following e Operations of digital conversion methods gt Page 38 Section 4 5 1 For the setting procedure for each digital conversion method refer to the following e Setting procedures for digital conversion methods 37 Page 43 Section 4 5 2 4 5 1 Operations of digital conversion methods 1 Sampling processing CT input values are converted to digital values in each set sampling cycle The converted values are stored as digital output values in the buffer memory 2 Averaging process Digital output values are averaged for each channel The averaged values are stored as digital output values in the buffer memory There are three types of averaging process as follows Time average Count average Moving average 38 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS a Time average Digital conversion is performed for the duration of the set time and a sum of the converted values except the maximum and minimum values is averaged The averaged value is stored in the buffer memory The number of processing within the duration of the set time varies depending on the set time and sampling cycle Number of Set time processing Sampling cycle Ex The number of processin
203. is backed up refer to the following e List of Buffer Memory Addresses 7 gt Page 91 Section 6 1 z2 Ng og For the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following 5 e Set value backup completed flag X6 gt Page 81 Section 5 2 1 3 9 2 2o When turning off then on Set value backup request Y6 set Disable 1 to the setting values of Conversion F o enable disable setting Un GO in all the channels and confirm that the digital conversion of the CT input module stops in all channels At stopping the digital conversion confirm if Converting or unused 0 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 If Set value backup request Y6 is turned off then on for any of the channels while the digital conversion is performed the error code 115 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The set value is not backed up 3 Operating condition setting request Y9 To enable the initial settings of the CT input module turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 For the contents of the initial settings to be enabled and the timing of turning on then off the signal refer to the following e Operating condition setting completed flag X9 L gt Page 84 Section 5 2 1 6 89 4 User range write request YA a Offset gain setting mode Turn on then off User range write request YA to register the adjusted offset gain values in the CT input module Th
204. is time the head pointer latest pointer number of logging data and trigger pointer are cleared and OFF 0 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 a Precautions It may take some time from when ON 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 till when ON 1 is set to CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 To resume the logging set OFF 0 to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 after checking ON 1 is stored in CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 CH Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 OFF 0 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 OFF 0 OFF 0 Logging after i i Logging status Logging 7 tiga ere cule Logging held Logging When OFF 0 is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 before ON 1 is stored in CHLI Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 the logging does not stop CH Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 OFF 0 ON 1 OFF 0 mdi Not held CH Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 OFF 19 Logging after Logging status Logging trigger execution Logging b Each buffer memory when logging resumes When the logging resumes the value in each buffer memory area is as below Buffer memory Value status CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1105 CHO Number of logging data
205. ital conversion resumes regardless of reset of Input signal error detection flag Un G49 and Input signal error detection signal XC Conversion completed 1 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 on the corresponding channel after the first update of a digital output value The ALM LED is flashing 4 Detection cycle This function is executed in each sampling cycle 5 Clearing the input signal error detection After the CT input value returns within the input range turn on then off Error clear request YF When the input signal error is cleared the CT input module results in the following states Input signal error detection flag Un G49 is cleared Input signal error detection signal XC turns off The ALM LED turns off The alarm code 11001 which is stored in Latest error code Un G19 is cleared 6 Setting procedure 1 SetEnable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO uonouny uonoejeq JONI JeuBis 1ndu 9p 2 SetEnable 0 to Input signal error detection setting Un1G47 3 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 45 4 7 Peak Current Detection Function An abnormal current value from a CT can be detected The peak current occurred excessively at a system start up or an overload of devices can be detected using the peak current detection function Doing so improves maintainability of devices and the failure diagnosis for a measured target 1 Notifying the peak current
206. ital output value exceeds the change rate of CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value Un1G141 When an error is detected in any channels in which the digital conversion or input signal error detection is enabled Warning output signal X8 turns on b Clearing Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 and Warning output flag Rate alarm Un G51 The alarms are cleared by any of the following The digital output value or the change rate of the digital output value returns within the setting range Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 113 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 114 14 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 Set whether the scaling is enabled or disabled for each channel For details on scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function 37 Page 50 Section 4 9 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO 0 01010710101010 CH8 CH7 cHe CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enable 1 Disable Point When Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 is disabled 0 is stored in CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 15 CHLI Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 The digital output value
207. l ALM LED remains flashing Averaging processing starts over after the digital conversion resumed 87 jeu amp is yndu L 7G sjeuBls O I Jo Sied Z S 10 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD turns on after the maximum or minimum values stored in the following buffer memory areas by turning on then off Maximum value minimum value reset request YD CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 Un G38 Un G40 Un G42 Un G44 CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 Un G39 Un G41 Un G43 Un G45 Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program CH1 Maximum value Un G30 to CH8 Minimum value Un G45 PR I ON 4 G 1 Maximum value minimum value bas 1 reset request YD OEE 1 SIRE I ON H s X OFF OFF Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD 11 Conversion completed flag XE Conversion completed flag XE turns on when the first digital conversion is completed in all conversion enabled channels 12 Error flag XF Error flag XF turns on when an error occurs Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program Latest error code Un1G19 0 Error 1 f ON Error flag XF OFF Error clear request YF OFF a Clearing the latest error code and Error flag
208. l output value exceeds the change rate of CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 to CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value Un G141 The ALM LED also turns on Warning output function turns off when the change of the digital output value falls within the setting range for all the digital conversion enabled channels The ALM LED also turns off Controlled by the CT input module Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 1 Alert process alarm or Warning output flag alone N rate alarm 3 0 Normal 1 l Rate alarm Un G51 ON d V N V Warning output OFF a OFF signal X8 jeu amp is yndu L 7G sjeuBbls O I Jo Sied z G 83 84 6 Operating condition setting completed flag X9 When changing the following settings use Operating condition setting completed flag X9 as an interlock condition to turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Conversion enable disable setting Un GO CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 Sampling cycle setting Un G26 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 Warning output setting Un G48 Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 Un G70 Un G72 Un G74 Un G76 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Un G71 Un G73 Un G75 Un G77 CHO Pr
209. le Controlled by the sequence program CH1 Peak current detection count Detection count before reset x 0 Un G334 a CH1 Peak current detection count reset OFF complete Un G310 CH1 Peak current detection count reset request Un G302 OFF 47 3 4 5 6 48 Peak current detection time The setting range of CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 is 10 to 10000ms Set CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 to an integral multiple of the sampling cycle When CHOI Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 is not set as the integral multiple of the sampling cycle the peak current is detected in the maximum cycle that satisfy both of the following Peak current detection time or less Integral multiple of the sampling cycle Ex When the sampling cycle setting and peak current detection time is set to 100ms 8CH and 950ms the peak current is detected in 900ms intervals integral multiple of 100ms Clearing the notification of the peak current detection Check that a digital output value is the peak current detection value or less and turn on then off Error clear request YF When the notification of the peak current detection is cleared the CT input module results in the following states Peak current detection flag UnXG301 is cleared Peak current detection signal X7 turns off The ALM LED turns off The alarm code 1200
210. le Y O x x O x O The module operates based Restore the user range settings on the test operation by writing of buffer memory addresses at this point Operation check is completed v 5 Resume the control i Module READY X0 turns on Restart the online module change using GX Works2 The module operates based on O O O O x O Y Click the Ex button to resume the control the initial setting sequence program which runs when Module READY X0 turns on 184 1 An access to Intelligent function module device ULGLI is included 2 prior to that In the absence of the operation marked 2 the operation of the intelligent function module is the operation performed CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 4 Online Module Change Procedure Perform an online module change using GX Works2 connected to a remote I O module This section describes two online module change procedures setting parameters using GX Works2 and setting parameters using a Sequence program Range setting Parameter setting Another system Reference Configuration function Page 187 Section 10 5 Factory default range Sequence program Page 193 Section 10 6 Present Page 200 Section 10 7 Configuration function Absent Page 213 Section 10 9 User range Present Page 206 Section 10 8 Sequence program Absent Page 220 Section 10 10 1 System configuration The following
211. le or turn off then on the power supply If a user range is not set in CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 an error error code 511 occurs When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode the stored value of the buffer memory is restored to the status before the switching The CT input module operates with the restored buffer memory values If a gain setting is configured for input whose digital value exceeds 10000 the accuracy of digital values cannot be guaranteed Configure an offset gain setting so that the digital values are within O tO 10000 When the mode is switched using the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN or Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 the digital conversion stops To resume the digital conversion turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 after switching the mode to the normal mode 2 Program example a Device Ex The I O numbers of the CT input module are X Y00 to OF The following table lists the devices used in the program example Device Function MO Channel selection M1 Offset setting M2 Gain setting M3 Channel change command M4 Command to write offset gain setting values to the module M5 Mode switching M10 Input range change command DO Channel specified storage device D1 Storage device for the setting value of the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS b Switching the mod
212. lfunction Point Dedicated instructions cannot be executed during an online module change Save and restore the offset gain setting values in the user range using a dedicated instruction in another system Precautions for using another system are as follows To change a module mounted on the remote I O station online save and restore the offset gain setting values in the user range using a dedicated instruction in another system mounted on the main base unit The offset gain setting values cannot be saved and restored using a dedicated instruction in another system mounted on the remote I O station If there is no other system restore the values by writing them to the buffer memory 253 eBueuo sinpow eujuo uo suonneoaug xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy eujuo e xipueddy Appendix 3 2 Conditions for online module change 254 To perform an online module change satisfy the following conditions 1 2 3 4 The function version of the first released CT input module is C and the CT input module supports the online module change CPU module A Process CPU or Redundant CPU is necessary For the precautions on the multiple CPU system configuration refer to the following QCPU User s Manual Multiple CPU System For the precautions on the redundant system configuration refer to the following LL QnPRHCPU User s Manual Redundant System Function version of MELSECN
213. line module change O Executed x Not executed User operation Operation of Operation of the CPU module Operation of the remote I O module the CT input module X Y FROM TO Dedicated Device Parameter Device refresh instructions instruction test setting test 1 Stop the operation Turn off all of the Y signals The module is operating O O O O x O turned on using the sequence normally program Y Y 2 Remove the module The operation of the module Start the online module change stops using GX Works2 The RUN LED turns off I Conversion disabled Click the 1 Eie button on x x x x x x GX Works2 to enable the module to be removed Remove the module M 3 Mount a new module Mount a new module Y The X Y refresh restarts and x the module starts up The RUN LED turns on Default operation starts Module READY X0 After mounting the module click x x x x the e button on GX Works2 gt remains off O O When there are initial setting parameters the module starts to operate based on the initial setting parameters at this point Check the operation before the control starts 4 Check the operation y Click the t t button on GX Works2 to turn off the online mode v On Device test on GX Works2 test the operation of the modu
214. ll not be lit 264 3 Mounting a new module Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H n e Module name Q68CT Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module Cancel APPENDICES Mount the removed module and new module to the other system Using the G P OGLOAD instruction save the offset gain setting values in the user range from the removed module to the CPU device Refer to 37 Page 243 Appendix 1 2 for the G P OGLOAD instruction Using the G P OGSTOR instruction restore the offset gain setting values in the user range to a new module Refer to gt Page 247 Appendix 1 3 for the G P OGSTOR instruction Remove the new module from the other system mount it to the slot from where the old module was removed in the original system and install the terminal block After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off 265 uajS S JEYJOUE UM wei6oid eouenbes e Buisn peunBijuoo eje S6unes jeu pue pesn si S uel Jasn e USYM 9 xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy uuo e xipueddy 4 Checking operation 1 To check the operation click the tance button to cancel the control start Online module change MELSO
215. logging function is enabled and Operating condition setting request Y9 is turned on then off the logging function turns disabled Error code 200 Setting error of CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Error code 300 Setting error of CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Error code 310 Setting error of CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Error code 320 Setting error of CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Error code 350 Setting error of Sampling cycle setting Un G26 Error code 2000 to 2060 Setting error of a parameter setting item for the logging function 64 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 Starting logging Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Data is logged in set logging cycle 5 Stopping logging Use a hold trigger to stop logging When the hold trigger is detected the CT input module stops logging after the number of logging data set in advance were collected The logging stopping method is as below 1 Set ON 1 to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 When Disable 0 is set to CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 the set number of logging data are collected and the logging stops When CHO Level trigger condition setting
216. lower limit However the digital conversion continues on the channel where an alert was output 53 54 b Operation after an alert was output After an alert was output when a digital output value is less than the process alarm upper lower limit value or more than process alarm lower upper limit value Normal 0 is stored in the corresponding bit of Warning output flag Process alarm Un G50 for the channel When digital output values in all channels are within the setting range Warning output signal X8 turns off and the ALM LED turns off However the alarm code 10 ALI which is stored in Latest error code Un G19 is not cleared Clear the alarm code 10A 0 by turning on then off c Warning detection period When time average is specified the function is executed per set average time When count average is specified the function is executed per set average count For other digital conversion methods the function is executed in each sampling cycle d Warning detection target When the scaling function is enabled CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 is applied to the warning detection For CH1 Process alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 to CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G117 set values considering the scale conversion e Setting procedure 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set Enable 0 to Warning output setting Un G48 3 Set values in CH1
217. lt value is read becomes valid by changing the value as necessary and turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 80 CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE 3 Set value backup completed flag X6 Use Set value backup completed flag X6 as an interlock condition to turn on then off Set value backup request Y6 The buffer memory areas whose set values are backed up are with O in Set value backup area in the List of Buffer Memory Addresses 3 Page 91 Section 6 1 a When writing succeeded When the set value of each buffer memory area is written to the non volatile memory by turning on Set value backup request Y6 Set value backup completed flag X6 turns on When Set value backup request Y6 is turned off Set value backup completed flag X6 also turns off Controlled by the CT input module gt Controlled by the sequence program ON Set value backup request Y6 OFF N Conversion enable disable 0 1 setting Un GO Enable 1 Disable Status of the non volatile Writing Writing succeeded 1 memory Before writing x 7 Latest error code Un G19 0 K i t I 1 ON Set value backup completed IN R flag X6 OFF OFF OFF Error flag XF 81 jeu amp is yndu L 7G sjeuBls O I Jo Sied Z S b When writing fails When writing the set value of each buffer memory area failed by
218. me Average number of times 4 Time average Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 x Sampling cycle Sampling cycle Setting of CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Count average Un G1 to Un G8 x Sampling cycle Moving average Sampling cycle Primary delay filter Sampling cycle 1 The value after the decimal point is rounded off If the set logging cycle is not an integral multiple of the conversion cycle shown above the logging function operates in the maximum cycle of an integral multiple within the set range Ex 1 When setting as below in CH1 to CH8 Averaging process setting Un G24 Un G25 Sampling processing 0 Sampling cycle setting Un G26 100ms 8CH 3 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 Digital output value 0 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 1950 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 ms 1 The conversion cycle is 100ms The actual logging cycle is 1900ms an integral multiple of 100ms 62 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 6 in CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un1G1055 set the number of data to be collected from when the logging stop request hold trigger occurs until the logging stops The setting range of CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 is as below Item Setting range CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 1 to 5000
219. memory Un G1810 to Un G1969 as a history The maximum of 16 errors and alarms can be stored 1 Process of the error history function The error code and the error time are stored in the buffer memory area starting from Error history No 1 start address Un G1810 in order Error time is stored as follows Ex For error history No 1 b15 to b8 b7 to bO Un G1810 Error code Un G1811 First two digits of the year Last two digits of the year Un G1812 Month Day Un G1813 Hour Minute Un G1814 Second Day of the week Un G1815 i System area Un G1819 Item Stored data Example First two digits of the year Last two digits of the 20114 year Month Day Stored in BCD code 3294 Hour Minute 10354 Second 404 The value that corresponds to the day of the week is stored in BCD code Sunday 00 Monday 01 Day of the week 024 Tuesday 02 Wednesday 03 Thursday 04 Friday 05 Saturday 06 1 This is the example of error occurrence at 10 35 40 on Tuesday March 29th 2011 Point The process for an alarm is the same as the one for an error Once the error history storage is full existing data are overwritten starting from those in Error history No 1 Un G1810 to Un G1819 in order a new error history replaces existing one The stored error history is cleared when the power is turned off or the CPU module is reset 74 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 2
220. n G130 UnG 132 Un G134 Un G136 Un G138 Un G140 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 Un G135 Un G137 Un G139 Un G141 Conversion formula of judgement value for the rate alarm is as follows Judgement value for rate alarm RH or RL At N Por x Dmax X detection digit 1000 1000 Item Description RH Rate alarm upper limit value Unit 0 1 s RL Rate alarm lower limit value Unit 0 1 s DMax Maximum digital output value of the input range 10000 At Rate alarm warning detection period Unit ms 56 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS Ex Judgement value in case of the following conditions Sampling cycle 10ms 8CH Rate alarm warning detection period 10 10ms Rate alarm upper limit value 300 30 s 300 1000 The present value is compared to the previous value in 10ms intervals and is checked if the value increased by 30 digits 0 3 10 x 10000 x 30 digit 1000 e Warning detection target CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 is a target regardless of the use of the scaling function f Setting procedure 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set Enable 0 to Warning output setting Un G48 3 Set values to CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G 125 Item Setting range CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G 125 10 to 5000 msy 1 Set an integral multiple
221. n G233 Address Decimal Reference Description value CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 CH8 Hexadecimal 202 204 206 208 210 212 214 216 Factory default setting offset value 000000004 203 205 207 209 211 213 215 217 Factory default setting gain value 00002710 218 220 222 224 226 228 230 232 User range setting offset value 000000004 219 221 223 225 227 229 231 233 User range setting gain value 000027 104 e qe eoueJejes eBues LL OL 221 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes errors that may occur in a CT input module and troubleshooting for them 11 1 Error Code List This section describes error codes that occur in a CT input module 1 Error code checking method The error codes that occur in a CT input module can be checked by the following Choose a method depending on the purpose and application e Checking on the Module s Detailed Information window s Page 229 Section 11 1 1 a e Checking in Latest error code Un G19 gt Page 229 Section 11 1 1 b e Checking through the module error collection function 3 Page 230 Section 11 1 1 c 228 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING a Checking on the Module s Detailed Information window Follow the following procedure XO Diagnostics gt System Monitor System Monitor 3 1 Select the CT input module in Main p Monitor Status Connection Channel List itoring
222. n G75 Un G77 2 Calculation method for a scaling value A value is performed scale conversion using the following formula The scaled values after the decimal point are rounded off Dx x SH SL Scaling value SL DMax Item Description Dx Digital output value DMax Maximum digital output value for the used input range 10000 SH Scaling upper limit value SL Scaling lower limit value 3 Setting procedure 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting UnYGO 2 Set Enable 0 to Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 3 Set values to CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 Item Setting range CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 Un G70 Un G72 Un G74 Un G76 32000 to 32000 CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Un G71 Un G73 Un G75 Un G77 4 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Point The maximum resolution does not change regardless of the scaling upper limit value and the scaling lower limit value to be set Performance specifications 7 Page 27 Section 3 2 1 Digital output values can be scaled in a negative slope so that the values become as follows Scaling lower limit value gt Scaling upper limit value CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 Example settings of the scaling Ex 1 Setting values as Scaling upper limit value
223. n the Error flag SM0 and a corresponding error code is stored in SDO error codes when For the errors not described in this manual refer to the following en SNE ne QCPU User s Manual The device numbers specified for and exceed the device point range Hardware Design Maintenance CE and Inspection Error code 4004 Program example When M2000 is turned or or when the connected device disconnects connection No 1 connection No 1 is disconnected by the following program Device used E Device number Simple program example s 501282 Open completion signal and descriptions of the devices used Ed Oremus eod D200 SP SOCCLOSE instruction control data M200 SP SOCCLOSE instruction completion device Program solgen soppen Procseng for Secomacten of w Gomecson Na by fie target Leg oppo MP qaa woo Common hada E mp gp somal amaaen mmis ror campen 13 14 Instructions can be executed under the following conditions On the risin On the fallin Execution condition Any time During on ae During off ae edge edge Symbol No symbol 1 The following devices can be used Internal device Setting system user File data p register Bit Word oe a T ST C D Applicable ang W SD mu SB FX R ZR device FY SW FD 2 eu Link direct device JONO Bit Word Intelligent function module
224. nels Word device buffer memory 3 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Device 4 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped C Buffer memory Module star JU v 2 with Conversion completed flag Un1G10 Setting value DOFF HEX 16 bit integer z se Program Label reference program Execution history Device Setting condition Force OFF Force ON Force OFF OOFF wes6ojd eouenbes e Bulsn pesnByuoo eje sHuljes ejui pue pesn si SBuel jnejap A0498 e USYM S E xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Bulsp ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy eujuo e xipueddy 257 2 Removing a module E Open the Online module change window ystem Monitor bj Installed status Base Base Module Meemo Tt ed OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Unmol 2 ia s aerei Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Parameter status p Mode 170 Address o 10 20 C System monitor 0j 1J 2 Online module change Powe Intell None None rsu Q25PHCPU gent ppl T6pt 16pt 16pt Status Bl Module system enor E Module error E Module warning Jessen B Module change Stop monitor Online module change Eq 3 Click the button to enable
225. ng mode Turn on Channel change request YB flag XA is off Then turn off User range write request YA Y Y Check that Channel change completed Check that Offset gain setting mode flag XB is on flag XA is on v Turn off Channel change request YB Is the ERR LED on v Apply the current whose value is the Switch to the normal mode 1 same as the gain value C en 1 The following are the methods to switch modes normal mode offset gain setting mode normal mode Dedicated Instruction G P OFFGAN 3 Page 241 Appendix 1 1 Setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 L Page 120 Section 6 2 21 Intelligent Function Module Switch Setting 7 gt Page 145 Section 8 2 153 ueJ6oJd e wouy Bunes z 3 9 Bunes ureD7esyO 958 154 Point Configure the offset gain setting in accordance with the actual use situation Offset and gain values are recorded in the non volatile memory in the CT input module by turning on then off User range write request YA The values are not deleted even after the power is turned off If the values are written 26 times in succession an error error code 162 occurs and the error code is stored in Latest error code Un G19 to prevent an improper write to non volatile memory Configure the offset gain setting in the
226. ng request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 126 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 34 CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 Use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 as a trigger to hold stop the logging at any timing during the logging for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function 13 Page 60 Section 4 12 Logging hold request Setting value OFF 0 ON 1 In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2070 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on However the logging continues When Disable 1 is set to CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 the setting for CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is ignored a Operation of the logging hold processing When Disable 0 is set to CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 When ON 1 is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 the logging hold processing starts When Above 1 Below 2 or Pass through 3 is set to CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 When the trigger condition is satisfied after ON 1 is set to CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 the logging hold processing starts When the level trigger is enabled use Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 as an inte
227. nitor 1 Monitoring zesuen 1 Cmm 1 0000000 nnnnnannnn 4 Modify Value Bit Bit Word Signed 194 Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window XO Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Enter and display the buffer memory address of Conversion enable disable setting Un GO Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Disable 1 for all channels Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 Confirm that the digital conversion has stopped with Conversion completed flag Un G10 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 2 Removing a module 1 Open the System Monitor window of the remote p Monitor Status f Connection Channel Lst eee anm I O module EET vene OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Mo ace ono 0011 oo Slat n E 2 Select Online Module Change under the Mode ee field and double click the module name to be Base Module Bese Medline Power Bese sots stale mee se eb sea esed sd EE E eer os ae changed online QJ72LF25 25 CPU mm Empty Empty 16Pont 0020 EE 8 tpn me Click the button to enable a module change Online Module Change r Operation r Target Module Madule Change I O Address 0000 Execution Module Name Q68CT Installation Confirmation
228. nnel after an alert was output When digital output values in all channels are within the setting range Warning output signal X8 turns off and the ALM LED turns off However the alarm code 10AQ which is stored in Latest error code Un G19 is not cleared Clear the alarm code 10ALI by turning on then off c Warning detection period Set a rate alarm warning detection period to CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 Set an integral multiple of the conversion cycle as the rate alarm warning detection period for each digital conversion method If not change rates are detected in the maximum cycle that satisfies both of the following Rate alarm warning detection period or less Integral multiple of the conversion cycle Rate alarm warning detection period in case of the following conditions Digital conversion method Count average Average times 10 Sampling cycle 100ms 8CH Rate alarm warning detection period 4500ms The conversion cycle is 1000ms 10 times x 100 ms and a digital output value is compared in 4000ms intervals to check the change rate d Judgement of rate alarm A change rate is judged that the rate alarm upper limit value and the rate alarm lower limit value are converted to digital values per rate alarm warning detection period Set a rate alarm upper limit value and rate alarm lower limit value to the following buffer memory areas CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 U
229. ns to the one within the setting range The corresponding bit of Input signal error detection flag Un G49 and Input signal error An input signal error is occurring 1100 e detection signal XC turn off by turning off on The channel where an input signal error has occurred fits in O and off Error clear request YF after the CT input value returns to the one within the setting range The corresponding bit of Peak current detection flag Un G301 and Peak current detection signal A peak current was detected 1200 X7 turn off by turning off on and off Error clear The channel where the peak current has been detected fits in L1 request YF after the CT input value returns to the one within the setting range 235 jsr SPOD Wely TLL 11 3 Troubleshooting 11 3 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off 1 When flashing Check item Action Is the operation in the offset gain setting mode Set the operation mode in the intelligent function module switch setting to the normal mode Or reset the switch 4 in the intelligent function module switch setting to the normal mode Set the operation mode to the normal mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 set Un G158 to 09644 and Un G159 to 41444 2 When off Check item Action Is the power supplied Check that the supply voltage of the power supply module is within the rated range
230. nt 100ms If an error occurs in the module an error code is displayed in BCD notation OMJON O I B OWSY ay uo ejnpoyy eui Burst ueuM 6 167 168 3 Switch setting For the switch setting refer to the procedure described in the following section z Page 171 Section 9 3 6 4 Initial setting a Channel setting Setting Item CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 to CH8 Conversion enable disable setting Enable Enable Enable Disable Samplin Primary Dela Samplin Averaging process setting p a Count Average od y 9 Processing Filter Processing Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant 0 50 Times 100ms 0 settings Sampling cycle setting 10ms 8CH Process alarm warning output setting Disable Enable Disable Disable P limit rocess alarm upper upper limi 0 7000 0 0 value Process alarm upper lower limit 0 6000 0 0 value Process alarm lower upper limit 0 1500 0 0 value Process alarm lower lower limit value 0 1000 0 0 Rate alarm warning output setting Disable Disable Enable Disable Rate alarm warning detection period 0 0 50ms 0 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 0 0 3 s 0 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 0 0 1 s 0 Input signal error detection setting Enable Disable Disable Disable Factory Default Factory Default Factory Default Factory Default Input range setting Range 0 to 5AAC Range 0 to 5AAC Range 0 to 5AAC Range 0 to 5AAC Peak curren
231. nt a new module in the same slot and install the Online Module Change terminal block Operation Target Module Module Change After mounting the module click the sa YO Address 0000 eee a Module Name 26807 button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit v Wess SE Module READY X0 remains off Confirmation Status Module Control Restart bee Module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module To check the operation click the Online Module Change button to cancel the control start Operation Target Module Module Change YO Address 0000 Execution Installation Module Name eset Confirmation Status v Module Control Ris Module Installation Completion Restart m Status Guidance utomatic refresh For the installed module are restarted lease confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton in controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and Execute MELSOFT Application Ed 2 Click the button to leave the Online The online module change is stopped Module Cha nge mode D Even if the stop is executed the online module change mode on the PLC side is not canceled Please execute the online module change and restart the control of the module again i To the next page 223 wajsks Jeaujouy jnoyym
232. nused 0 is stored in Conversion completed flag Un G10 If the set value backup function is used when digital conversion is in process in even one channel the error code 115 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on In this case the set values are not backed up Corresponding buffer memory data Buffer memory areas that correspond to this function are marked with O in the list of buffer memory addresses Ls Page 91 Section 6 1 How to use 1 Set Disable 1 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO for all channels 2 Turnon then off Operating condition setting request Y9 3 Turn on then off Set value backup request Y6 For details on Set value backup request Y6 refer to the following e Output signal L gt Page 89 Section 5 2 2 Precautions after executing the set value backup function After the set value backup function was executed the data restored to the buffer memory when the power was turned off then on or when the CPU module was reset are overwritten if the parameter settings on GX Works2 are changed Do not change parameter settings on GX Works2 after executing the set value backup function CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 14 Default Setting Registration Function Values in the buffer memory can be changed back to the default 1 Condition Use the default setting registration function in a condition where no digital conversion is performed set Disable 1 to Conversion enable disa
233. o the installation confirmation After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block Remove the module Point P Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 3 Mounting a new module Online Module Change i Operation Target Module Module Change I O Address 0000 Execution Installation Module Name Q68CT Confirmation i Status Module Control D Restart Changing Module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the next button after installing a new module 4 Checking operation Online Module Change Target Module I O Address Operation Module Change 0000 Execution Installation Module Name Q68CT Confirmation TATUS Module Control Change Module Installation Completion Restart Status Guidance The controls such as 1 0 FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh For the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed utton Execute v To the next page CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Mount the removed module and new module to the other system Using the G P OGLOAD instruction save the offset gain setting values in the user range from the removed module to the CPU device Refer to 3 Page 243 Appendix 1 2 for the G P OGLOAD instruction Using th
234. ocess alarm lower lower limit value Un G86 Un G90 Un G94 Un G98 Un G102 Un G106 Un G110 Un G114 CHO Process alarm lower upper limit value Un G87 Un G91 Un G95 Un G99 Un G103 Un G107 Un G111 Un G115 CHO Process alarm upper lower limit value Un G88 Un G92 Un G96 Un G100 Un G104 Un G108 Un G112 Un G116 CHO Process alarm upper upper limit value Un G89 Un G93 Un G97 Un G101 Un G105 Un G109 Un G113 Un G117 CHO Rate alarm warning detection period Un G118 to Un G125 CHO Rate alarm upper limit value Un G126 Un G128 Un G130 Un G132 Un G134 Un G136 Un G138 Un G140 CHO Rate alarm lower limit value Un G127 Un G129 Un G131 Un G133 Un G135 Un G137 Un G139 Un G141 CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Dropout detection setting Un G160 CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 Peak current detection setting Un G300 CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to Un G1055 CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 CHO Trigger data Un G1064 to Un G1071 CHO Trigger setting value Un G1082 to Un G1089 CHAPTER
235. ods is specified the maximum and minimum values are stored in each sampling cycle When the scaling function is used the maximum and minimum values after scale conversion are stored 10 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 Set whether to enable or disable the input signal error detection for each channel For details on the input signal error detection function refer to the following Input Signal Error Detection Function 103 Page 44 Section 4 6 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 cudcus CH2 CH1 0 Enable 1 Disable b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 111 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sieq Z 9 11 Warning output setting Un G48 Set whether to enable or disable the warning output process alarm and rate alarm for each channel For details on the warning output function refer to the following e Warning Output Function 037 Page 53 Section 4 10 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 Rate alarm setting Process alarm setting 0 Enable 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request
236. on SM400 H Z REMFR J1 K4 K1 HO K50 D2050 K2 M320 M320 wise Read Warning output flag Process H t MOV D2050 K4M10 O g outp g E alarm i i utpu Read Warning output flag Rate MOV D2051 4M LMO i KW39 1 alarm M12 P 7 aa Processing when an alert occurs for E n u imit valu TOGESSING WHEN anglers Occurs CH2 Process alarm upper limit value M13 P 7 T Processing when an alert occurs for n TOCGSSIQ MEN ANAS OLOUNS CH2 Process alarm lower limit value MM Processing when an alert occurs for Processing when an alert occurs E CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 180 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING M35 Processing when an alert occurs for Processing when an alert occurs mur CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value SM400 Z REMFR J1 K5 K1 HO K49 D2049 K1 M330 M330 M331 Read Input signal error detection WE MOV D2049 K2M50 flag n Processing when an input signal Processing when CH1 Input signal error is detected error X23 X100C Turn on input signal error reset I SET Y100F LE signal X100F ZP REMFR J1 K6 K1 HO K19 D2019 K1 M340 M340 M341 Jr BCD D2019 K4Y30 J Output the error code in BCD X24 X100F E SET Yi00 Turn on Error clear request Y100F X100C X100F i Pas AW RST Yioor j Turn off Error clear request MCR NO END JONN O I 90W34 eui uo ejnpojy eu Burst
237. on set a value per 10ms unit A value per 1ms unit is rounded off 4 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 PON uoisJeAuo eyBIQ S Y SPOYJSW UOISJOAUOD e ip 10 seunpeooud Bunes z Sr 43 4 6 Input Signal Error Detection Function Overrange of a CT input value excess of a peak value can be detected Since a CT input module can detect that a high current out of range flew through a measured target an error on the measured target is monitored easily Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program CH1 Conversion completed flag Un G10 b0 p Alternating Overrange Returns to current waveform occurrence the measurement n range Peak value i Current value from the CT Measurement range 2 Og SA of an input range Time Peak value i ON Sampling cycle CH1 Input signal error detection flag T i Un G49 b0 OFF x x OFF ON Es Input signal error detection signal XC i ESSE MEE 1 ot A OFF ON ONY f Value before the p X lt Value returned to CH1 Digital output value Un G11 overrange occurrence the measurement range 7 ON 1 p I d Error clear request YF OFF OFF z t k x 4 Latest error code Un G19 0 Error occurrence gt 0 1 Detection level of Input signal errors The
238. on time Set CH1 Peak current detection value Turn on Operating condition setting request Turn off Module READY check flag Turn off Operating condition setting request 165 S npouw uondUN JUSHI eJUI 94 JO SJaJaWEJEd Husn jou USYM ejdwexe WEJ OJd ZZ6 uoneunBijuo WISJS S PJEPUEIS e Ul ejnpoyy SU BuIsN ueuM Z6 166 X10 XO XOE Y9 UO M MOV G10 K2M0 MO UO i MOV G11 D11 M1 UO 1 MOV G12 D12 I M2 UO i MOV G13 D13 SM400 UO MOV G301 K2M70 M70 li Processing when a peak current is detected SM400 i UO MOV G50 KAM10 UO MOV G51 K4M30 M12 3 A Processing when an alert occurs 13 A Processing when an alert occurs M34 Processing when an alert occurs M35 Processing when an alert occurs SM400 UO MOV G49 K2M50 Mao Processing when an input signal error is detected X13 X0C i SET YOF XOF UO BCD G19 K4Y20 X14 SET YOF YOF XOC XOF RST vor Read Conversion completed flag Read CH1 Digital output value Read CH2 Digital output value Read CH3 Digital output value Read Peak current detection flag Processing when a peak current is detected for CH1 Peak current detection Read Warning output flag Process alarm Read Warning output flag Rate alarm Processing when an alert occurs for CH2
239. on 4 12 Ex When the value of CH2 Latest pointer Un G1099 is 3550 CH2 Logging data Un G10000 Un G13550 Latest data Oldest data gt UnIG 13551 13550 10000 3550 Un G 14999 Point CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1105 moves one by one each time data is stored from when the logging starts When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1105 is cleared 45 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1113 The number of data stored in the logging data storage area can be checked for each channel during the logging For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function 0 37 Page 60 Section 4 12 Point The number of logging data is added one by one each time data is stored from when the logging starts When the 5000 data is stored in the logging data storage area the value is overwritten from the head again Therefore CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1113 is fixed to 5000 When CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1113 is cleared 134 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 46 CHO Trigger pointer Un G1114 to Un G1121 The address of buffer memory which stores the data of when a hold trigger was generated can be checked in CHO Logging data Un G5000 to Un G44999 for each channel The diff
240. on 4 13 Unwritable and unreadable For details on the default setting registration function refer to 3 Page 73 Section 4 14 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 3 Un G5000 to Un G44999 Logging section Address Address er Default Read Write ee decimal hexadecimal value E 5000 13884 to to CH1 Logging data 0 R 9999 270Fy 10000 27104 to to CH2 Logging data 0 R 14999 3A97 15000 3A98y to to CH3 Logging data 0 R 19999 4E1Fy 20000 4E204 to to CH4 Logging data 0 R 24999 61A7y 25000 61A84 to to CH5 Logging data 0 R 29999 752Fy 30000 75304 to to CH6 Logging data 0 R 34999 88B7 35000 88B8 gt to to CH7 Logging data 0 R a 39999 9C3Fy 40000 9C40 E to to CH8 Logging data 0 R z 44999 AFC7y 3 1 Default value set at factory shipment z 2 This shows whether read or write from sequence program is possible 5i R Readable W Writable 2 9 This shows that whether write to the non volatile memory by the set value backup function and read by the default setting registration function is possible O Writable and readable Unwritable and unreadable For details on the set value backup function refer to 3 Page 72 Section 4 13 For details on the default setting registration function refer to 3 Page 73 Section 4 14 105 6 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses The following describes the details of buffer memory addresses 1 Conve
241. on setting Un G1056 to UniG1063 c ee ad eve Ex 130 CHO Logging cycle monitoring value Un G1122 to UMG1 146 hes te oa son Ea Binet 135 CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to UM G 1039 var 2 ate wee pe aha hae ade AT 128 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 Date POT Same tek sale keg Satte RETE ERAT RD eR e Yd 128 CHO Logging data Un G5000 to UnG44999 137 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un1G1031 rmm 128 CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to UNG1007 1 RR RT hae A A 126 CHOI Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 EE pus EE tat Sy KD EE EE 127 CHOI Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 Eod EA an EN d 127 CHO Logging points after trigger Un G1048 to UNG 1055 asap vite de Gia ele Ge De 130 CHO Maximum value Un G30 Un G32 Un G34 Un G36 Un G38 Un G40 Un G42 Un G44 111 CHO Minimum value Un G31 Un G33 Un G35 Un G37 Un G39 Un G41 Un G43 Un G45 111 CHO Number of logging data Un G1106 to Un G1113 da alee la aid lede OG ER i ante ed 134 CHO Peak current detection count Un G334 to UNGS4AL i Eat hetse HR nea 126 CHO Peak current detection count reset complete Un G310 to UNIG317 llle 124 CHO Peak current detection count reset request Un G302 to Un G309 0 124 CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 EEE ah Se end Wa a Adan tes 125 CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to UMNG333 ua eek oe ex ee eke aa eo
242. output value Un G11 to Z Un G18 to check if the digital conversion is Data Type Bt sts performed properly ON Settable Range Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delete C 8 Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING gt Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on If the ERR LED is off If Error flag XF is off wa sks JSYJOUV yim wei6oig eouenbes e Buisn 19S eJy s1ejeueJeg pue pas s Buey sasn e USUM S OL 9 Since the new module is in the default status initial settings must be configured using a sequence program after the control resumed Before the initial setting check if the initial setting program is proper satisfying the following Insert a user device where the initial setting will be set at any timing initial setting request signal into the sequence program Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network In this case the initial setting is not set 211 5 Resuming operation 1 Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change D Diagnostics gt Online Module Change 2 Click the Be button on the appeared window to resume control Module READY X0 turns on 3 The
243. peak value can be detected Since a CT input module can detect that a high current out of range flew Page 44 Input signal error detection function i through a measured target an error on the measured target is monitored Section 4 6 easily When digital output values exceed the set peak current detection value Paus 46 Peak current detection function consecutively for the duration of the peak current detection time set in Mind A7 i advance an error can be detected When an input current is around OA a CT s conversion accuracy is low To add Dropout function avoid digital output of such an unstable CT input value digital output values Ein 4d i i within the set value can be dropped to 0 forcibly A digital output value can be scaled into a value within the range of the set Page 50 Scaling function scaling upper limit value to lower limit value Ein di i The sequence programming for scale conversion can be omitted When a digital output value enters the alert output range set in advance an Page 53 Process alarm Warning alert is output Section 4 10 1 output When a change rate of a digital output value is equal to or more than the Page 55 function Rate alarm rate alarm upper limit value 96 s or that is equal to or less than the rate d i alarm lower limit value s an alert is output Section 4 10 2 Maximum value minimum value hold The maximum and minimum of digital output values or scaling value
244. peration Startup and Maintenance Precautions NWARNING Do not touch any terminal while power is on Doing so will cause electric shock or malfunction Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before cleaning the module or retightening the terminal screws or module fixing screws Failure to do so may result in electric shock or cause the module to fail or malfunction Undertightening can cause drop of the screw short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can damage the screw and or module resulting in drop short circuit or malfunction NCAUTION Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so may cause failure malfunction injury or a fire Shut off the external power supply all phases used in the system before mounting or removing the module Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction A module can be replaced online while power is on on any MELSECNET H remote I O station or in the system where a CPU module supporting the online module change function is used Note that there are restrictions on the modules that can be replaced online and each module has its predetermined replacement procedure For details refer to the relevant chapter in this manual After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit of 5
245. r trigger Un G1048 i CH1 Number of logging data i Un G1106 lt 5000 points Sten gt Controlled by the CT input module 65 Ex When CHO Level trigger condition setting Un G1056 to Un G1063 is set to a value other than Disable 0 and CH1 Digital output value Un G11 is logged CH1 Logging hold request Un G1008 OFF 0 bs ON 1 Trigger condition Not satisfied p Satisfied LUN Hold trigger is i executed The logging is held CH1 Logging data The data stored before the last N Un G5000 to Un G9999 5000 data are discarded CH1 Logging points after i trigger Un G1048 CH1 Number of logging data Un G1106 sedes Controlled by the CT input module lt 5000 points 6 Checking the stop of the logging Check that CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 turns ON 1 7 Checking trigger detection time The time at that the hold trigger was detected can be checked in the buffer memory Even when the logging cycle is set as less than 1s the minimum time unit recorded in CHO Trigger detection time Un G1154 to Un G1185 is second Use trigger detection time as an indication to refer to the logging data 1 When the hold trigger is detected as soon as turning on the programmable controller the CT input module may not obtain the time in the CPU module If the module could not obtain the time the trigger detection time is recorded 0 0 0 on January 1st 2000 Trigg
246. r on the CT input module while data is written to or read from the CPU module the corresponding error code below is stored in Latest error code Un1G19 The error is reported to the CPU module also SI 9po9 J043 Lb Error code n i Description and the error cause Action decimal CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G 157 is set to a Set CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 100 value outside the range of 00004 to 00054 or 00104 to 00154 to a value within the range of 00004 to 00054 or The channel where the error has occurred fits in O 00104 to 00154 Turn the power off then on If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred 111 A hardware failure has occurred on the module on the module Please consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 112 A value other than 0 is set to Switch 5 on the intelligent function Set 0 to Switch 5 on the intelligent function module module switch setting switch setting in the parameter setting Check the digital output value If there is a problem of the digital output value please 1131 The backup data has a problem consult your local Mitsubishi system service service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Write the backup data If the error occurs again a failure might have occurred 1141 The writing of backup data went
247. range satisfying the condition described in the following section If a setting is out of the specified range the maximum resolution and accuracy of the module may not fall within the range described in the performance specifications list O conversion characteristics lt _ gt Page 29 Section 3 2 2 The offset gain setting can be configured for multiple channels at the same time however the offset setting and gain setting must be configured separately If the settings are configured at the same time an error error code 500 occurs and the ERR LED turns on When User range write request YA is turned on the integrity of the offset and gain values are checked If an error error code 400 occurs in even one channel the offset and gain values are not written to the module Check the value in Latest error code Un G19 and take the action described in the following section to start over the offset gain setting Error Code List 5 Page 228 Section 11 1 When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode by the setting of the dedicated instruction G P OFFGAN or Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Module READY XO turns on Note that initial settings are processed at this timing if any sequence program is set to configure initial settings when Module READY X0 turns on To activate the intelligent function module switch setting after writing the setting to the CPU module reset the CPU modu
248. range write request YA For the user range setting restoration refer to the following ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 737 Page 182 CHAPTER 10 Controlled by the CT input module x Controlled by the sequence program ON Module READY X0 Offset gain setting mode flag XA OFF OFF User range write request YA 85 86 8 Channel change completed flag XB When changing a channel to perform the offset gain setting use Channel change completed flag XB as an interlock condition to turn on then off Channel change request YB For the offset gain setting refer to the following e Offset gain Setting 37 Page 150 Section 8 5 Bee gt Controlled by the CT input module Controlled by the sequence program Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 Channel where offset or gain is specified Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Channel change completed OFF flag XB OFF Channel change request YB CHAPTER 5 I O SIGNALS ASSIGNED TO THE CPU MODULE 9 Input signal error detection signal XC Input signal error detection signal XC turns on when an input signal error is detected An input signal error is detected only when the input signal error detection function is enabled For details on the input signal error detection function refer to the following Input Signal Error Detection Function 037 Page 44 Section 4 6
249. rd error 1960 Error history No 16 16th error CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 1 6 Module Error Collection Function Errors and alarms occurred in the CT input module can be collected into the CPU module The error information of the CT input module can be held in a CPU module memory as a module error history even when the power is turned off or the CPU module is reset Error history CPU module and error log intelligent function module are displayed on one screen J Errors that are detected in the entire base system can be monitored in chronological order Module A Module B CPU i 47 19 29 Error A1 is detected 49 34 Error B1 is detected 19 33 Error C1 is detected 4 19 36 Error A2 is detected Time Module with error Error code 19 29 ModuleA i ErrorA1 19 33 CPU I ErrorC1 19 34 Module B Error B1 19 36 ModuleA Error A2 Error history CPU module A 19 33 Error C1 1 LI 1 8 i 1 i B amp H V B e 1 hi 1 a A 1 5 t E 1 tE oa Programming tool 1 ws D Lc Error history display 2 1 1 1 1 Li Module error log Time Module with error Error code 19 29 Module A i Error A1 19 34 ModuleB Error B1 19 3
250. red saved at operations below Writing the initial setting by a programming tool Turning off then on Operating condition setting request Y9 Turning off then on User range write request YA in offset gain setting mode 1 The data is not saved when the setting value is written to Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 When restoring the offset gain setting value in the user range set the data saved in these areas to the same area in the CT input module where the data is restored a Procedure for saving offset gain values into the buffer memory area 1 Turnoff then on Operating condition setting request Y9 2 Compare CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un1G233 with the values in the range reference table For the range reference table refer to the following Range Reference Table gt Page 227 Section 10 11 3 Ifthe values are proper save the values in CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un1G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un1G233 For setting procedure of the offset gain values refer to the following e Offset gain Setting 037 Page 150 Section 8 5 b Default value All channels are set to 0 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 26 Peak current detection setting Un G300 Set whether to enable or disable the peak current detection for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following Peak Current D
251. rlock to generate the level trigger If CHO Logging hold request Un G1008 to Un G1015 is turned OFF 0 the hold status stop is cleared Also the logging resumes b Default value All channels are set to OFF 0 35 CHO Logging hold flag Un G1016 to Un G1023 Logging hold status can be checked with this flag for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following Logging Function 037 Page 60 Section 4 12 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 Logging hold status Stored value OFF 0 ON 1 When the logging status changes to the stop hold from the execution ON 1 is stored When the logging is resumed OFF 0 is stored 127 36 CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 Set whether the logging target is the digital output value or the scaling value for each channel For details on the logging function refer to the following e Logging Function 037 Page 60 Section 4 12 Logging target Setting value Digital output value 0 Scaling value 1 In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 2030 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on Also logging cannot be performed When Disable 1 is set to CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 the setting for CHO Logging data setting Un G1024 to Un G1031 is ignored a Enabling the setting Turn on th
252. rm lower upper limit value 0 R W O 116 744 CH8 Process alarm upper lower limit value 0 R W O 117 75H CH8 Process alarm upper upper limit value 0 R W O 118 764 CH1 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 119 TTH CH2 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 120 78H CH3 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 121 794 CH4 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 122 TAY CH5 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 123 7BH CH6 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 124 7Ch CH7 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 125 7Dy CH8 Rate alarm warning detection period 0 R W O 126 TEH CH1 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 127 7Fy CH1 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 128 804 CH2 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 129 814 CH2 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 130 824 CH3 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W Oo 131 834 CH3 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 132 844 CH4 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 133 854 CH4 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 134 86H CH5 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 135 874 CH5 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 136 884 CH6 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 137 894 CH6 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 138 8Ay CH7 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 139 8By CH7 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 140 8Ch CH8 Rate alarm upper limit value 0 R W O 141 8Dy CH8 Rate alarm lower limit value 0 R W O 142 8Ey to to System area 149 95 150 96 CH1 Input range setting 00004
253. rol Module READY X0 Confirmation button on the appeared Status 1 turns on v Module Control pee Module Installation Completion Restart Status Guidance The controls such as I O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button cont 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application E3 J Online module change completed wajsks Jaujouy UNM UONDUN4 UoHesINBYyUOD ay Buisn JES aly sjejyeueJeg pue pasn s eBues sN e ueuM Z OL 205 10 8 when a User Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using a Sequence Program with Another System 1 Stopping operation 1 Create anew project New Project XO Project gt New 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC PLC Series d Type and click the button QCPU Q mode PLC Type Q372LP25 Q772BR 15 Remotel O v 3 Open the Transfer Setup window OD Navigation window gt Connection Destination view gt Connection destination data name All Connections ay Connection 4 Configure the settings to access the module on the Transfer Setup Connection x d d x con ck Ehemet i m remote I O station and click the Sas H Board Board Board Bus Board p com COM1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps button CCIEFeld CCIEFild CCIE Field MAC Master Loc
254. ropped to 0 forcibly 1 Operation of the dropout function When the value in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 is equal to or less than the set value in CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 in advance 0 is stored in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 2 Setting procedure 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set Enable 0 to Dropout detection setting Un G160 3 Set values to CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 Item Setting range CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 1 to 10000 4 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 To check whether the dropout function is enabled or disabled refer to the following Dropout status flag Un G161 7 7 Page 121 Section 6 2 23 uonounj jnodaqg gp 49 4 9 Scaling Function 50 A digital output value can be scaled into a value within the range of the set scaling upper limit value to lower limit value The sequence programming for scale conversion can be omitted The scale converted values are stored in CHO Scaling value Un G54 to Un G61 1 Concept of scaling setting Set values corresponding to the lower limit value 0 of the input range to CHO Scaling lower limit value Un G62 Un G64 Un G66 Un G68 Un G70 Un G72 Un G74 Un G76 Set values corresponding to the upper limit value 10000 of the input range to CHO Scaling upper limit value Un G63 Un G65 Un G67 Un G69 Un G71 Un G73 U
255. rror Information Error and Solution Latest Error Code 0148 Contents CH1 Average processing setting Lin G24 is set to a value outside the range of 0 to 4 Error Clear Display Format HEX Solution Set a value within the range of 0 to 4 in CH1 Average d processing setting Un G24 DEC he error history is sequentially displayed from old error The latest error is displayed at ie bottom line Stop Monitor SI 9po9 J043 Lb b Checking in Latest error code Un G19 Follow the following procedure XD Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Device Device Name uoi TIC Set Value Reference Program Reference C Buffer Memory Module Start v HEX Address z pec Modify Value Display Format Open Display Format Save Display Format 229 c Checking through the module error collection function The errors occurred in a CT input module are saved in the CPU module through the module error collection function Therefore the error details are kept unerased even if the power is turned off or the CPU module is reset Checking procedure The CT input module s errors that were collected by the CPU module can be checked on the Error History window Diagnostics gt System Monitor E Click the Error History Detail button Error History Monitor Status Connection Channel List D Stop Monitor Serial Port
256. rsion enable disable setting Un GO Set whether to enable or disable the conversion for each channel After setting CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 depending on the CT connected set Enable 0 For details on the conversion enable disable function refer to the following e Conversion Enable Disable Function gt Page 37 Section 4 3 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO O O OJOJ O JO 0 O CH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Enable 1 Disable a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to Disable 1 106 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 2 CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Set the time average count average moving average and time constant of the primary delay filter for each channel for which the averaging processing is specified For details on the digital conversion method refer to the following e Digital Conversion Method 37 Page 38 Section 4 5 The following shows the setting range Digital conversion method Setting range Time average 40 to 5000 ms Count average 4 to 500 times Moving average 2 to 1000 times Primary delay filter 10 to 10000 ms 1 Set an integral multiple of the sampling cycle If the time average and primary delay filter are
257. s Are Set Using a Sequence Program without Another System 0 0 0 0 eee m nn 220 10 11 Range Reference Table 1 2 0 cece e n 227 CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 228 11 1 Error Code List ere oorr bte Der ee X feeder e e AWO 228 11 2 Alarm Gode List ns otc cec CENTROS ol CERE NEU el ato YS 235 1153 Troubleshooting maiaa e prat ue UR den EO A de 236 11 3 1 When the RUN LED flashes or turns off liiiiiissss eee eens 236 11 3 2 When the ERR LED turns on or flashes 0 00 000 cece eee eee eens 236 11 3 3 When the ALM LED turns on or flashes 00 0 cece eee eens 237 11 3 4 When a digital output value cannot be read 6 cee eee eee 237 11 3 5 When Conversion completed flag does not turn on in the normal mode 238 11 4 Checking the CT Input Module Status on GX Works2 System Monitor 239 APPENDICES 240 Appendix 1 Dedicated Instruction 0 6 e eee nes 240 Appendix LL US P OEEGANCzS a oes ont atat c Enc ne et se age oe 241 Appendix 1 2 G P OGLOAD SA 243 Appendix 1 3 G P OGSTOR storie ameter degeret desto e darse or peer wer Ad 247 Appendix 2 When Using GX Developer isissesssssesse n 251 Appendix 2 1 Operation of GX Developer les 251 Appendix 3 Online Module Change Procedure When Using GX Developer 253 Appendix 3 1 Precautions on online module change 00000000ee eee eee 253 Appendix 3 2 Conditions for online module change
258. s after scale conversion by the scaling function are stored for each channel The scaling values are stored with 16 bit signed binary b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bO LTT TTTTTtTtTtTtirtitit i v I Data section Sign bit 1 Negative 0 Positive CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 16 CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 Set the range of scale conversion for each channel For details on scaling function refer to the following e Scaling Function s Page 50 Section 4 9 a Setting range Setting range 32000 to 32000 In the channel where a value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 900 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The scaling upper limit value and scaling lower limit value in the channel for which an error occurred operate in the setting before the error occurs When Disable 1 is set to Scaling enable disable setting Un G53 the setting for CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 is ignored Setting the scaling lower limit value more than the scaling upper limit value allows scale conversion with a negative slope b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0 Point Since 0 is set as the default value change the set value to use th
259. s are Page 59 function stored to the buffer memory for each channel Section 4 11 A digital output value or scaling value can be logged 5000 data can be Page 60 Logging function logged for each channel Section 4 12 33 jsi uogound Ee Item Description Reference Set values in the buffer memory can be backed up into the non volatile memory Since backup data are restored at the next start up programs for Page 72 Set value backup function Me G initial settings are not required after the set value backup function was Section 4 13 executed 4 Page 73 Default setting registration function Values in the buffer memory can be changed back to the default Section 4 14 ues Page 150 Offset gain setting A slope of I O conversion characteristics can be changed Section 8 5 3 Errors and alarms occurred in the CT input module are stored up to the Page 74 Error history function gt latest 16 records in the buffer memory Section 4 15 Errors and alarms occurred in the CT input module can be collected into Page 77 Module error collection function i the CPU module Section 4 16 i y Page 78 Error clear function When an error occurs the error can be cleared on the system monitor Section 4 17 Page 182 Online module change A module can be replaced without stopping the system CHAPTER 10 34 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS CHAPTER 4 Functions This chapter de
260. s2s Enpty l Pot 0010 l Poit 0020 Mair Eror Mode Mader Assignment Error Assignment Incorrect Online Module Change m Operation Module Change Execution Installation Confirmation Module Control Restart Target Module I O Address 0000 Module Name Q68CT Status pe Module Selection Completed Status Guidance lease turn off signal of the changed module hen you change the intelligent Function module lease press next button when you are ready Point came Open the System Monitor window OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Select Online Module Change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Click the button to enable a module change When the following error window appears click the button and perform the operation described in lt gt Page 223 Section 10 10 3 MELSOFT Application i The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block Remove the module Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 222 CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 3 Mounting a new module Mou
261. scribes the details of the CT input module s function and the setting procedures for the functions For details on I O signals and the buffer memory refer to the following e Details of I O Signals 037 Page 80 Section 5 2 Details of Buffer Memory Addresses gt Page 106 Section 6 2 4 1 Processing Each Function A CT input value and digital value are processed in the following order If multiple functions are enabled the output of the first processed function is used as the input for the next function CT input Input signal Pen Dropout Averai dl FN Digital output value error detection detection pc ging g gt Minimum value function process value CH1 to CH8 function function v Warning output function Scaling function 1 Scaling value gt Maximum value ut er Logging function gt Logging data 1 CT input value This is an alternating current value measured using a CT This is a primary current which a CT imports 2 Digital output value A digital value after the sampling processing or an averaging process was performed uonouny uoe3 BuIsseoold Lp 3 Scaling value This is a digital output value which was performed scale conversion 4 Maximum and minimum values Either of the following are stored The maximum and minimum digital output values when the scaling function is disabled The maximum
262. set not requested 0 is set to CHO Peak current detection count reset request Un G302 to Un G309 Reset not requested 0 is stored in CHO Peak current detection count reset complete Un G310 to Un G317 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 30 CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 Set the unit time in ms for peak current detection for each channel For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following e Peak Current Detection function 2 Page 46 Section 4 7 a Setting range Setting range 10 to 10000ms Configure per 10ms unit A value per 1ms unit is rounded off Setan integral multiple of the sampling cycle If these areas are not set as the integral multiple the peak current is detected at the maximum cycle satisfying the peak current detection time or less and the integral multiple of the sampling cycle Ex The actual peak current detection time for the following setting is 900ms integral multiple of 100ms Sampling cycle setting 100ms 8CH Peak current detection time 950ms In the channel where a value of the sampling cycle or lower is set an error occurs The error code 360 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The peak current detection time before the error occurs is applied When Disable 1 is set to Peak current detection setting Un G300 the setting of CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 is ignored b Enabling the s
263. setting Q68CT 14 89 maximum 2 Checking method The maximum number of parameter settings and the number of parameter settings set for the intelligent function module can be checked on the following Project window Intelligent Function Module gt gt Right click 5 gt Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter List Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Status XY Address Module Name Initialization Count Auto Refresh Count A 0000 Q68CT Intelligent Function Module Parameter Setting Count Total Initial Auto Refresh Max 2048 1 2 3 4 No Description 1 The total number of parameters in initial settings checked on the window 2 The maximum number of parameter settings in initial settings 3 The total number of parameters in the auto refresh setting checked on the window 4 The maximum number of parameter settings in the auto refresh setting 3 3 CHAPTER 3 SPECIFICATIONS Function list The following is the function list of the CT input module Item Description Reference An input range can be selected for each channel depending on a measured target from the following ranges Factory default ranges 0 to 5AAC 0 to 50AAC 0 to 100AAC 0 to Page 36 Input range setting 200AAC 0 to 400AAC and 0 to 600AAC Section 4 2 User ranges 0 to 5AAC 0 to 50AAC 0 to 100AAC 0 to 200AAC 0
264. signal error detection flag Un G49 112 Input signal error detection function 44 Input signal error detection setting Un G47 111 Input signal error detection signal XC 87 Latest address of error history Un G1800 137 Latest error code UnG19 108 Level data O Un G1072 to Un G1081 132 Logging data llle 35 Logging function 202000 ee eee 60 Maximum and minimum values 35 Maximum value minimum value hold function 59 Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag XD 4 Sosa ew opiate aah oes tees ee ER 88 Maximum value minimum value reset request YD poh Aces wind an ehh ae Roe ced oop OE ange 90 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 120 Module error collection function 77 Module READY X0 2 aa llle 80 Moving average llle 40 Offset value face he Aaa 2s b Em 29 Offset gain setting llle 150 Setting from Offset Gain Setting of GX Works2 AE cc pup me reni A Mo bana DONIS EE Me Duc 150 Setting from aprogram 153 Offset gain setting mode flag XA 85 Offset gain setting mode Gain specification Un G23 Sa E bog deti Pete Ps awe ES 109 Offset gain setting mode Offset specification Un G22 jab eoe urbes dU e og celibate BO tr E aaah Dat be ay a 109 Online module change ssl 182 Online module change procedure When us
265. stem in advance to ensure that it would not affect the other modules For the operational verification check the following Means of cutting off the connection to external devices and its configuration are correct Switching on off does not bring any undesirable effect After the first use of the product do not mount remove the module to from the base unit and the terminal block to from the module more than 50 times IEC 61131 2 compliant respectively Exceeding the limit may cause malfunction CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 2 Conditions for Online Module Change To perform an online module change satisfy the following conditions The function version of the first released CT input module is C and the CT input module supports the online module change 1 Function version of MELSECNET H remote I O module A module of function version D or later is necessary 2 Compatible version of GX Works2 GX Works2 of Version 1 408 or later is necessary 3 Restrictions of base unit When the module is mounted on any of the following base units an online module change cannot be performed Slim type main base unit Q3LISB Extension base unit Q5L1B which does not require the power supply module An online module change cannot be performed for all modules on the base unit eBueu e npojy euijuo 40 SUOMIPUCD ZOL 183 10 3 Online Module Change Operations The following table explains the operations for an on
266. system configuration is used to explain the online module change procedure Remote master station Station No 0 Remote I O station Station No 1 QCPU QJ71LP21 25 X Y00 to X Y1F QJ72LP25 25 CT input module X Y1000 to X Y100F E GX Works2 Network No 1 185 eJynpeooJg SBueyn snpoy eujuo OL 186 2 Procedure The following flow shows the online module change procedure Start Stop the operation Remove the module Mount a new module Check the operation Resume the control End CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 5 wnena Factory Default Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using the Configuration Function 1 Stopping operation 1 Create anew project New Project XO Project gt New 2 Select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O in PLC PLC Series Use Labe SETET Type and click the ox button PLC Type QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O h 3 Open the Transfer Setup window OD Navigation window gt Connection Destination view gt Connection destination data name All Connections a Connection 4 Configure the settings to access the module on the Transfer Setup Connection1 Sed CE Cont cent Qseree NETON remote I O station and click the oea USB fea Board Board Bus Board com COM 1 Transmission Speed 115 2kbps button CCIEFeld CCIEFild CCIE Field MAC
267. t value Process alarm lower upper limit value Process alarm lower lower limit value Rate alarm warning output setting Rate alarm warning detection period Rate alarm upper limit value Rate alarm lower limit value E Input signal error detection Input signal error detection setting Scaling function Scaling enable disable setting Scaling upper limit value Scaling lower limit value Input range setting Input range setting Dropout setting Dropout detection setting Dropout value Peak current detection setting Peak current detection setting Peak current detection time Peak current detection value Logging function Logging enable disable Logging cycle setting value SO Times 100 ms 0 10ms 8CH Set about the warning of digital conversion 1 Disable D Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 7000 6000 1500 1000 1 Disable 1 Disable H 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 00 00 Q0 s Ms 00 DO s 01 00 OO Q0 s 00 00 Set about the input signal of digital conversion O Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Set about the scaling of digital conversion 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Di 1 Disable ME TE EE TE TE dqu ge HE OE OE 0 EE 0 i Set about the input range of digital conversion O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Default O Factory Defa
268. t detection setting Enable Disable Disable Disable Peak current detection time 1000ms 1000ms 1000ms 1000ms Peak current detection value 7000 0 0 0 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 5 Setting on the master station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select the CPU module used for PLC Type XO Project gt New New Project Simple Project Cancel Use Label PLC Series ocru Q mode PLC Type Q10u0H Language Ladder v 2 Display the network parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows D Project window Parameter Network Parameter Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Parameter MELSECNET CC IE Ethernet Module Configuration rer fm e 0000 XOMJON O I 910u183 euj uo ejnpoyy 24 BuIS ueuM 6 Necessary Setting No Setting Already Set Set if itis needed No Setting Already Set Start I O No Valid Module During Other Station Access fi z Interlink Trans Paramet ateriak Transmission Parameters please input 16 point unit HEX to start IO No in which module is mounted eee Routing Parana Assignment Image Check End Cancel Print Window Print Window IPFE GI 169 3 Display the network range assignment setting window and configure the setting as follows OD Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET gt een uto Network Parame
269. t signal error detection signal XC Error flag XF Latest error code Un1G19 For the timing to clear the contents refer to the following e Peak current detection signal X7 37 Page 82 Section 5 2 1 4 Input signal error detection signal XC gt Page 87 Section 5 2 1 9 Error flag XF gt Page 88 Section 5 2 1 12 e Latest error code Un G19 gt Page 88 Section 5 2 1 12 CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY This chapter describes the buffer memory of the CT input module 6 1 List of Buffer Memory Addresses The following shows the list of the CT input module buffer memory addresses For details of buffer memory addresses refer to the following e Details of Buffer Memory Addresses gt Page 106 Section 6 2 Point Do not write data to the system area and the area where the data cannot be written from the sequence program in the buffer memory Writing data to those areas may lead the module to malfunction 1 Un GO to Un G1799 Set value Address Address Default Read Write gt Name 4 backup area decimal hexadecimal value 2 d 0 OH Conversion enable disable setting OOFFy R W CH1 Average time Average number of times Movin 4 tu verage ti veragenu i ving 0 RAW O average Time constant settings 9 CH2 Average time Average number of times Movin Z 2 2 verage ti Vi genu i ving 0 EU O z average Time constant set
270. table lists the part names of a CT input module 1 1 Q68CT gt RUN ALM 4 3 2 gt ERR c 1 HL 2 kl Al 3 2 4 4 kl 3 6 kl Al 7 4 4 8 k m 9 5 s 10 ic pan er 12 r de 14 r de 8 16 NC NC O68CT vi U Number Name Description RUN LED green Indicates the operating status of the CT input module On The module is operating normally Flashing In the offset gain setting mode Off The 5V power off or watchdog timer error has occurred or online module change enabled ERR LED red Indicates the errors and status of the CT input module On An error has occurred except for error code 112 Flashing Error code 112 is occurring Off The module is operating normally ALM LED red Indicates the alarm status of the CT input module On Alarm process alarm rate alarm is occurring 2 Flashing Input signal error detection peak current detection is occurring Off The module is operating normally 4 Serial number display Displays the serial number printed on the rating plate 4 Error Code List 1037 Page 228 Section 11 1 2 Alarm Code List 3 Page 235 Section 11 2 140 CHAPTER 7 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 2 Signal names of the terminal block The following shows signal names
271. ter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and I O assignments Assignment Method 225 itoring Ti X 10ms PointsjStart Monitoring Time Parameter Name rei 1 Switch Screens pw Setting Start End NM ENMANI D E y 1000 10FF v Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Parameter Assignment the MNET 10 H Remote Station Network Range Module No 1 Setup common parameters and I O assignments Assignment Method zx itoring Til X 10ms Points Start Monitoring Time Parameter Name ee a Switch Screens xY Setting v Start End 1000 10FF 256 ooo0 GOFF 3 1000 10FF 0000 Pope 170 CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING 4 Display the refresh parameter setting window and configure the setting as follows OD Project window gt Parameter gt Network Parameter gt Ethernet CC IE MELSECNET Network Parameter MNET 10H Refresh Parameter Module No 1 5 Write the set parameters to the CPU module on the master station Then reset the CPU module or turn off and on the power supply of the programmable controller X 5 Online 2 Write to PLC or Power OFF ON 6 Setting on the remote I O station 1 Create a project on GX Works2 Select QCPU Q mode for PLC Series and select QJ72LP25 QJ72BR15 Remotel O for PLC Type OD Project
272. the CT input module is set to 0 For the details of I O signals refer to the following e Details of I O Signals 7 5 Page 80 Section 5 2 Input signal Output signal Device number Signal name Device number Signal name X0 Module READY YO x1 Y1 x2 Y2 Use prohibited xs Use prohibited vs X4 Y4 X5 Default setting completed flag Y5 Default setting request X6 Set value backup completed flag Y6 Set value backup request X7 Peak current detection signal Y7 B X8 Warning output signal Y8 pt prena x9 Operating condition setting completed flag Y9 Operating condition setting request XA Offset gain setting mode flag YA User range write request XB Channel change completed flag YB Channel change request 2 XC Input signal error detection signal YC Use prohibited XD Maximum value minimum value reset YD Maximum value minimum value reset completed flag request XE Conversion completed flag YE Use prohibited XF Error flag YF Error clear request 19 5 2 Details of I O Signals The following describes the details of the CT input module I O signals assigned to the CPU modules The I O numbers X Y described below show the case that the start I O number of the CT input module is set to 0 5 2 1 Input signal 1 Module READY X0 Module READY X0 turns on to indicate the preparation for the digital conversion is completed at the power on or reset operation of the CPU module
273. the default values Switch the mode by setting Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 and turning on Operating condition setting request Y9 269 uejs s Jayjoue INOYM wei6oid eouenbes e Buisn peunBijuoo eje S6unes jeu pue pesn si ue asn e USYM 2 xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy eujuo e xipueddy 2 Removing a module Z Open the Online module change window ystem Monitor bj Installed status Base Base Module Meemo Tt ed OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Unmol 2 ia s aerei Select Online module change under the Mode field and double click the module name to be changed online Parameter status p Mode 170 Address o 10 20 C System monitor 0j 1J 2 Online module change Powe Intell None None rsu Q25PHCPU gent ppl T6pt 16pt 16pt Status Bl Module system enor E Module error E Module warning Jessen B Module change Stop monitor i button to enable a module Online module change E3 3 Click the Operation Target module change Module change execution 1 0 address 000H 5 DE Module name Q68CT Installation confirmation Status Change module selection completed Module control restart Status Guidance Please t
274. the setting c Default value All channels are set to 0 Point Since 0 is set as the default value change the set value to use the rate alarm CHAPTER 6 BUFFER MEMORY 20 CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 Set the CT input range for each channel For details on the input range setting refer to the following Input Range Setting 1037 Page 36 Section 4 2 Input range Setting value 0 to SAAC 00004 0 to 50AAC 00014 0 to 100AAC 00024 Factory default range 0 to 200AAC 00034 0 to 400AAC 00044 0 to 600AAC 00054 0 to SAAC 00104 0 to 50AAC 00114 0 to 100AAC 00124 User range 0 to 200AAC 00134 0 to 400AAC 00144 0 to 600AAC 00154 In the channel where a setting value other than the above is set an error occurs The error code 100 is stored in Latest error code Un G19 and Error flag XF turns on The setting range before the error occurs is applied a Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting b Default value All channels are set to 0 to SAAC factory default range 0000 Point Since 0 to 5AAC factory default range 0000p is set as the default value change the setting depending on the connected CT sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 119 21 Mode switching setting Un G158 Un G159 Set the value for the mode to be switched to Setting v
275. tings o CH3 Average time Average number of times Movin 3 3 vorage t Vi genu i ving 0 EN o 3 average Time constant settings 9 CH4 Average time Average number of times Movin 4 44 Mer MM iis 0 R W O 3 average Time constant settings Q lt CH5 Average time Average number of times Movin gt 5 Bi Varage u verge nu i ving 0 RAW O average Time constant settings a n CH6 Average time Average number of times Movin D 6 6 verage ti Verde nu i ving 0 RAW O 9 average Time constant settings CH7 Average time Average number of times Movin 7 Ta verage ti Vi ganu i ving 0 RAW O average Time constant settings CH8 Average time Average number of times Movin 3 8 verse Vi ge nu i ving 0 RAW O average Time constant settings 9 94 System area 10 Au Conversion completed flag 0000 R 11 Bu CH1 Digital output value 0 R 12 Cu CH2 Digital output value 0 R 13 Dy CH3 Digital output value 0 R 14 Ey CH4 Digital output value 0 R 15 Fy CH5 Digital output value 0 R 16 104 CH6 Digital output value 0 R 17 11H CH7 Digital output value 0 R 91 Set value Address Address Default Read Write decimal hexadecimal Name value 2 pen area 18 124 CH8 Digital output value 0 19 134 Latest error code 0 20 144 2i 15 System area 22 16 Offset gain setting mode Of
276. to 400AAC and 0 to 600AAC r 5 Page 37 Conversion enable disable function Digital conversion can be enabled or disabled for each channel j Section 4 3 H RE A sampling cycle can be selected from 10ms 8CH 20ms 8CH 50ms 8CH Page 37 Sampling cycle switching function or 100ms 8CH Section 4 4 CT input values are converted to digital values in each sampling cycle The Page 38 Sampling processing m converted values are stored as digital output values in the buffer memory Section 4 5 1 1 Time Digital conversion is performed for a set time and a sum of the converted Page 39 i PTUS values except the maximum and minimum values is averaged The Section 4 5 1 2 V d averaged values are stored in the buffer memory a Digital Digital conversion is performed the set number of times and a sum of the Page 39 Averaging Count k N i conversion PEA Eee converted values except the maximum and minimum values is averaged Section 4 5 1 2 V method p d The averaged values are stored in the buffer memory b 2 Bd MK i Page 40 Moving Digital output values for the specified number of times are averaged in Section 4 5 1 2 i 15 average each sampling cycle The averaged values are stored in the buffer memory c Primary delay filter Depending on the set time constant digital output values with smoothed noise can be obtained Page 41 Section 4 5 1 3 Overrange of a CT input value excess of a
277. to ae MM Set a value within the range of 32000 to 32000 in n CH8 Scaling upper limit value Un G77 are outside the range of MM 9001 CH1 Scaling lower limit value Un G62 to CH8 32000 to 32000 i an EN Scaling upper limit value Un G77 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O CHO Logging enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un G1007 Set Enable 0 or Disable 1 in CHO Logging 2000 is set to a value other than 0 and 1 enable disable setting Un G1000 to Un1G1007 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O Set a value within the setting range in one or both of i CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to A value outside ine setting range is set in one or both of CHO Un G1039 or and CHO Logging cycle unit setting 20107 Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to UnG1039 or and Un G1040 to Un G1047 CHO Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 The channel where the error has occurred fits in O For the setting procedure of a logging cycle refer to the following Logging Function 5 Page 60 Section 4 12 233 SI 8POD J043 LL Error code Description and the error cause Action decimal Set CHO Logging cycle setting value Un G1032 to Un G1039 and CHLI Logging cycle unit setting Un G1040 to Un G1047 so that the logging cycle is The set logging cycle is shorter than the update cycle of the equal to or longer th
278. to the CPU module G P OGSTOR This instruction restores the offset gain set values in a user range setting to the CT input module Point When the module is mounted on a MELSECNET H remote I O station the dedicated instructions cannot be used 240 APPENDICES Appendix 1 1 G P OFFGAN Command G OFFGAN Leren un H Command GP OFFGAN f c ora un H Setting Internal device JOO Constant R ZR UDO GO Zn Others data Bit Word Bit Word K H O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting range Data type Un Start I O number of the module 0 to FE BIN 16 bits Mode change 0 changed to the normal mode S 1 changed to the offset gain setting mode 0 1 BIN 16 bits When a value other than above is set the mode is changed to the offset gain setting mode 2 Functions This instruction switches the operation mode of the CT input module Normal mode offset gain setting mode Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on Offset gain setting mode normal mode Offset gain setting mode flag XA is off NvOddO d O L L xpueddy uononujsu pejeoipeq xipueddy Point When the mode is switched from the offset gain setting mode to the normal mode Module READY X0 turns on Note that if a sequence program includes the initial settings to be executed at ON of Module READY X0 this instruction performs the initial se
279. tting process When the mode is switched the digital conversion stops To resume the digital conversion turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 after switching the mode to the normal mode 3 Errors The instruction has no errors 241 242 4 Program example The following shows the sequence program of the CT input module installed in I O number X Y00 to X YOF with the following conditions Turning on M10 switches the operation mode of the CT input module to the offset gain setting mode Turning off M10 restores the operation mode of the CT input module to the normal mode M10 tt MOVP K1 D1 G OFFGAN UO D1 XOA c Processing in offset gain setting mode M10 M MOVP KO D1 G OFFGAN UO D1 X0A A Processing in normal mode END Store the setting data of the dedicated instruction G OFFGAN in D1 Dedicated instruction G DFFGAN Store the setting data of the dedicated instruction G DFFGAN in D1 Dedicated instruction G OFFGAN APPENDICES Appendix 1 2 c P ocLoAD Command G OGLOAD JT G OGLOAD E Command GP OGLOAD _f GP OGLOAD Un E Setting Internal device JOO Constant R ZR uoco Zn Others data Bit Word Bit Word K H O O 1 Setting data Device Description Setting rang
280. tting request Y9 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un1G11 to Un G18 to check if the digital conversion is performed properly Before starting the control check the CT input module for the following If an error occurs refer to TROUBLESHOOTING _ Page 228 CHAPTER 11 and take a corrective action If the RUN LED is on Ifthe ERR LED is off f Error flag XF is off Since the new module is in the default status initial settings must be configured using a sequence program after the control resumed Before the initial setting check if the initial setting program is proper satisfying the following Insert a user device where the initial setting will be set at any timing initial setting request signal into the Sequence program Do not create a sequence program which sets the initial setting only one scan after a data link start of the remote I O network In this case the initial setting is not set CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 5 Resuming operation Open the Online Module Change window again Online Module Change Operation Target Module OD Diagnostics gt Online Module Change Module Change 000 7 Execution 1O Address D Click the button on the appeared Installation Module Name Q68CT window to resume control Module READY X0 Confirmation E Status SSS turns on v Module Control hange Module Installation Completion Restart Status Guidan
281. turning on Set value backup request Y6 the error error code 114 occurs and the CT input module operates as follows Set value backup completed flag X6 turns on Error flag XF turns on The ERR LED turns on When Set value backup request Y6 is turned off Set value backup completed flag X6 also turns off Controlled by the CT input module gt Controlled by the sequence program ON Set value backup request Y6 OFF OFF 1 y 0 i Conversion enable disable setting Enable i 1 Disable i Un GO i i I t Status of the non volatile Before writing xK Writing X b memory Writing failed 1 i an var N 1 Latest error code Un G19 0 X Error code 114 Npa L oN i PM n Set value backup completed OFF vw OFF flag X6 V ON P Error flag XF OFF 4 Peak current detection signal X7 Peak current detection signal X7 turns on when a peak current is detected A peak current is detected only when the peak current detection function is enabled For details on the peak current detection function refer to the following e Peak Current Detection Function 7 s Page 46 Section 4 7 a Turning on Peak current detection signal X7 flashes When digital output values exceed the set peak current detection value consecutively for the duration of the peak current detection time set in advance Peak current detection signal X7 turns on Th
282. uation a Mechanism of a CT A CT utilizes characteristics of an alternating current Iron core Primary coil NE a Secondary coil k K Primary current I1 Secondary current I2 b Secondary windings T2 l Primary windings T1 L Primary and secondary coils winded an iron core are isolated electrically When a primary current I1 is applied to the iron core a secondary current I2 can be extracted depending on the turn ratio current transformation ratio The following shows the relationship of a primary current a secondary current and windings Primary current 11 x Windings T1 Secondary current I2 x Windings T2 Current transformation Primary current I1 _ Secondary windings T2 eter Secondary current I2 Primary windings T1 There are two CT types the contact type and noncontact type The noncontact type is classified into the window type and split type which is easy to be retrofitted 2 Operation of a CT input module A CT input module measures an alternating current by converting a secondary current input from a CT to a digital value after carrying out an effective value operation The above flows are defined as digital conversion in this manual 16 CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 1 Alternating current measurement of eight points eight channels by one module One module can measure an alternating current with eight points eight channels
283. uch as I O FROM TO instruction executions and automatic refresh for the installed module are restarted Please confirm the parameter setting wiring etc and press completed button cont 3 The online module change is complete MELSOFT Application x e Ll Online module change completed wajsks Jeaujouy noy m UoNdDUN4 UONEINBYUO ey Bursf 19S su SJSJSWEJEd pue pes s Sbuey esq e ueuM 6 0L 219 10 10 when a User Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using a Sequence Program without Another System 1 Stopping operation New Project Simple Project PLC Series QCPU Q mode PLC Type Q372LP25 Q772BR 15 Remotel O v All Connections e Connection1 Transfer Setup Connection1 L g CCIE Cont CC Link Ethernet USB NEMO Board oard Board COM COM1 Transmission Speed 115 2Kbps CCIEFeld CCIEFild CCIE Field MAC AGJQSTEL Bus Master Local Communication Ethernet Module Head Module Adapter Computer Type QJ72LPZ5 ERIS hee Other Station Other Station Single Network Co existence Network Connection Channel List PLC Direct Coupled Setting Time Out Sec 30 Retry Times 0 E i PLC Type Remotel O Detail CCIECont CCIEFld Ethernet CCLink NET 10 H System Image Phone Line Connection C24 CCIECont CCIEField Ethernet CC Link NET 10 H Accessing Host Station Multiple CPU Setting toz a 4 To the next page
284. ueuM 6 e npou uonoun 1ueBi ejui eui JO sJejeueued Husn jou USYM ejduiexe weibolg ZEG 181 CHAPTER 10 oNLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 1 182 This chapter describes the online module change procedure using GX Works2 The online module change procedure with GX Works2 is applicable only when the CT input module is used on a MELSECNET H remote I O network When the CT input module is not used on the MELSECNET H remote I O network perform the online module change using GX Developer lt s Page 253 Appendix 3 When performing an online module change carefully read the following LI QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection Precautions on Online Module Change This section lists precautions on an online module change e Always perform an online module change in the correct procedure gt Page 185 Section 10 4 A failure to do so can cause a malfunction or failure Perform an online module change after making sure that the system outside the programmable controller will not malfunction Provide means such as switches for powering off each of the external power supply and external devices connected to the module to be replaced online Failure to do so may cause an electric shock and malfunction of operating modules After the module has failed the buffer memory data may not be saved properly Prerecord the data to be saved It is recommended to perform an online module change in the actual sy
285. uidelines This manual is included with the CPU module or base unit The CE mark on the side of the programmable controller indicates compliance with EMC and Low Voltage Directives 2 Additional measures No additional measures are necessary for the compliance of this product with EMC and Low Voltage Directives RELEVANT MANUALS 1 CPU module user s manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description QCPU User s Manual Hardware Design Maintenance and Inspection lt SH 080483ENG 13JR73 gt Specifications of the hardware CPU modules power supply modules base units extension cables and memory cards system maintenance and inspection troubleshooting and error codes QnUCPU Users Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080807ENG 13JZ27 gt Qn H QnPH QnPRHCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals lt SH 080808ENG 13JZ28 gt Functions methods and devices for programming 2 Programming manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description MELSEC Q L Programming Manual Common Instruction lt SH 080809ENG 13JW10 gt Detailed description and usage of instructions used in programs 3 Operating manual Manual name lt manual number model code gt Description GX Works2 Version1 Operating Manual Common lt SH 080779ENG 13JU63 gt System configuration parameter settings and onlin
286. ulation tube on the wire connection part of a solderless terminal 142 CHAPTER 7 SETTINGS AND THE PROCEDURE BEFORE OPERATION 7 4 2 External wiring The following describes the external wiring Power side Detection line Detection line 8 1 CT input module i i Terminal block K i CH1 i uu k i Protection element AUN Jod EOS Ski L I Gh a K CH8 Protection k f r i i element 7 iL Ck E ESSE pre Connection cable l Load side Point amp Set Disable 1 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO for unused channels If Enable 0 is set to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO and the circuit between two terminals is kept open an undefined digital value may be output Buum v To replace a CT for a channel using a user range set the offset gain setting again Buum euog zv 143 CHAPTER 8 VARIOUS SETTINGS This chapter describes the setting procedures of the CT input module Point After writing the contents of new module switch settings parameter settings and auto refresh settings into the CPU module reset the CPU module switch STOP gt RUN gt STOP RUN or switch on the power supply to validate the setting contents 8 1 Adding a Module Add the model name of the CT input module to use on the project 1 Addition procedure Open the
287. ule device ULIGLI is included o c 2 In the absence of the operation marked 2 the operation of the intelligent function module is the operation performed 3 n o prior to that g B 255 Appendix 3 4 This section describes three online module change procedures factory default setting user range setting with another system and user range setting without another system Range setting Initial setting Another system Online module change procedure Reference Factory default range Sequence program Page 257 Appendix 3 5 User range Sequence program Present Page 263 Appendix 3 6 Absent Page 269 Appendix 3 7 1 System configuration The following system is used to explain the online module change procedure CT input module X YO to X YF 2 Procedure The following flow shows the online module change procedure Start Stop the operation Remove the module Mount a new module Check the operation Resume the control End 256 APPENDICES Appendix 3 5 When a factory default range is used and initial settings are configured using a sequence program 1 Stopping operation 1 Open the Device test window Device test Bit device Baie i XO online gt Debug gt Device test v E 2 Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to FORCE ON FORCE OFF Tog lefore Disable 1 for all chan
288. ult O Factory Default O0 Factory Default O0 Factory Default Factory Default Range ACO to 54 Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Range ACO to 5A Set about the dropout of digital conversion 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable EE LLL i LLL Set about the peak current detection of digital conversion O Enable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable 1 Disable Di 1 Disable 1000 ms 7000 Daws 03 Set whether to Enable or Disable logging Function O Enable 1 Disable 173 IOMJON O I BJOWSY euj uo ejnpoyy 24 Burst ueuM 6 5 Display the Q68CT auto refresh setting window and configure the setting as follows When creating a program without using parameters of an intelligent function module skip this procedure Project window Intelligent Function Module gt Q68CT 5 gt Auto Refresh 0000 Q68CT Auto Refresh W1002 W1003 6 Write the set parameters to the remote I O module and reset the remote I O module amp 5 Online 2 Write to PLC Press the switch We 2 for a while 174 9 3 1 function module 1 Device for user Device Description CHAPTER 9 PROGRAMMING Program example when using parameters of the intelligent W1000 Conversion completed flag W1001 D
289. unction refer to the following Dropout Function gt Page 49 Section 4 8 b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bl bo 0 0 9 O O O O 0 ICH8 CH7 CH6 CH5 CH4 CH3 CH2 CH1 b8 to b15 are fixed to 0 0 Dropout disabled 1 Dropout enabled a Dropout status flag Un G161 status When the dropout function is enabled Dropout enabled 1 is stored in Dropout status flag Un G161 When the dropout function is disabled Dropout disabled 0 is stored in Dropout status flag Un G161 24 CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 Set the digital output value which is dropped out for each channel For details on the dropout function refer to the following Dropout Function 037 Page 49 Section 4 8 a Setting range Setting range 1 to 10000 When the value after digital conversion is the dropout value or less 0 is stored in CHO Digital output value Un G11 to UnG18 b Enabling the setting Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 to enable the setting c Default value All channels are set to 50 121 sesseJppy Aioweyy Jejng Jo sjieleq Z 9 122 25 CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 User range setting gain value Un G233 These are the areas for restoring the offset gain setting value in the user range Data for restoring the offset gain setting value of the user range is sto
290. urn off Y signal of the changed module when you change the intelligent function module Cancel 4 Whenthe following error window appears click the described in 03 Page 271 Appendix 3 7 3 MELSOFT series GX Developer The target module didn t respond The task is advanced to the installation confirmation 5 After confirming that the RUN LED of the module has turned off remove the terminal block 6 Remove the module Point Always remove the module If mounting confirmation is made without the module being removed the module will not start properly and the RUN LED will not be lit 270 3 Mounting a new module Online module change Operation Target module Module change execution 1 0 address 000H a n MODE Module name Q68CT Installation confirmation Status Module control restart Changing module Status Guidance The module can be exchanged Please press the Execute button after installing a new module APPENDICES Mount a new module in the same slot and install the terminal block After mounting the module click the button and make sure that the RUN LED is lit Module READY X0 remains off uejs s Jayujoue INOYM wei6oid eouenbes e Buisn peunBijuoo eje S6unes jeu pue pesn si ue asn e USYM Z xipueddy 1edoje eq x9 Buisn ueuM eunpeooug eBueu ejnpojy uuo xipueddy 271 4 Checking operation umen x 1 Tocheckthe operation click the tance
291. ver to offset gain setting mode Are you sure you want to continue Caution Digital conversion will be cancelled when switching over to offset gain setting mode In case of error occurrence at the target module the error will be cleared when switching over to offset gain setting mode Yes Offset Gain Setting Set offset gain settings Target Module Offset Gain Setting Channel Selection Offset Status Gain Status IV HL cu p cus cu cus T cue I cuz cus Please select a target channel For the offset gain setting and press Offset Setting or Gain Setting Pressing Close registers to the module 150 Input Range Setting Enable to change the input range setting for each channel Input Range CH Input Range CH1 _ Not to Change x co User Range ACO to 4004 User Range ACO to 6004 Caution Information will be directly written to Input Range Setting area of buffer memory Data will have some differences because the information is not reflected to Intelligent Function Module Parameters x Coa MELSOFT Series GX Works2 Execute the offset settings Please press the Yes button after setting the current to the target channel Offset Gain Setting Set offset gain settings Target Module 0000 Q68CT Error Code Offset Gain Setting Channel Selection Offset Status Gain Status Offset Setting Iv CHL Changed
292. weis6oig eouenbes e Husn 42S eJy sjejeurejeg pue pasn s eBues Jasn e ueuM OL OL From the previous page 4 Click the ie button to close the System Monitor window Open the Device Buffer Memory Batch Monitor window D Online gt Monitor gt Device Buffer Memory Batch Display the address of the prerecorded buffer memory area and select it Then click the To the next page 224 From the previous page 4 Modify Value Device Label Buffer Memory Device Label ya Data Type Bit E ON Settable Range Execution Result Execution Result Device Label Data Type Bit Bit Word Signed Bit Bit Module Start 0000 Word Signed Reflect to Input Column Delete C 1000 H CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE Set the prerecorded data to the buffer memory Turn User range write request YA from off to on to restore the offset gain setting value in the user range to the module After confirming that Offset gain setting mode flag XA is on turn off User range write request YA Set Conversion enable disable setting Un GO to Enable 0 for the channel used 10 Turn on then off Operating condition setting request Y9 11 Monitor CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 to check if the digital conversion is performed properly 12 Before starting the control check the CT input
293. which is stored in Latest error code Un G19 is cleared Point When Error clear request YF is turned on then off in the condition where a digital output value exceeds the peak current detection value the peak current detection is notified again after a lapse of the peak current detection time Detection target CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 is a target regardless of the use of the scaling function Setting procedure 1 Set Enable 0 to Conversion enable disable setting Un GO 2 Set Enable 0 to Peak current detection setting Un G300 3 Set values to CHO Peak current detection time Un1G318 to Un G325 and CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 Item Setting range CHO Peak current detection time Un G318 to Un G325 10 to 10000 ms CHO Peak current detection value Un G326 to Un G333 0 to 11999 1 Set an integral multiple of the sampling cycle If not the peak current is detected in the maximum cycle that satisfies both of the following Peak current detection time or less Integral multiple of the sampling cycle In addition set a value per 10ms unit A value per 1ms unit is rounded off 4 Turnon then off Operating condition setting request Y9 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTIONS 4 8 Dropout Function When an input current is around 0A a CT s conversion accuracy is low To avoid digital output of such an unstable CT input value digital output values within the set value can be d
294. wing table lists systems that use a CT input module and applicable software packages A programming tool is required to use a CT input module Item Software version GX Developer GX Works2 Q00J Q00 Q01CPU Single CPU system Version 7 or later Multiple CPU system Version 8 or later Version 1 77F or later Q02 Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU Single CPU system Version 4 or later Multiple CPU system Version 6 or later Single CPU system N A Q02PH Q06PHCPU Version 8 68W or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q12PH Q25PHCPU Version 7 10L or later Multiple CPU system Q12PRH Q25PRHCPU Redundant system Version 8 45X or later Single CPU system Q00UJ Q00U Q01UCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system 02U Q03UD Q04UDH Single CPU system 9 a Q x Version 8 48A or later QO6UDHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q10UDH Q20UDHCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q13UDH Q26UDHCPU Version 8 62Q or later Multiple CPU system Version 1 77F or later QOSUDE Q04UDEH Q0GUDEH Single CPU system Version 8 68W or later Q13UDEH Q26UDEHCPU Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q10UDEH Q20UDEHCPU Version 8 76E or later Multiple CPU system Single CPU system Q50UDEH Q100UDEHCPU N A Multiple CPU system If installed in a MELSECNET H remote I O station Version 6 or later 1 When using GX D
295. xample when using parameters of the intelligent function module 9 2 2 Program example when not using parameters of the intelligent function module 9 3 When Using the Module on the Remote I O Network llle 9 3 1 Program example when using parameters of the intelligent function module 9 3 2 Program example when not using parameters of the intelligent function module CHAPTER 10 ONLINE MODULE CHANGE 10 1 Precautions on Online Module Change 0 0 0 0 eee eee 10 2 Conditions for Online Module Change 0 000 cece es 10 3 Online Module Change Operations 0 0 0 0 10 4 Online Module Change Procedure 0 ccc eee 10 5 When a Factory Default Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using the Configuration F hGtlori s OR eS eS ee oR es ee be Soe ee M 187 10 6 When a Factory Default Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using a Sequence Programs ste xoti sor tete t gun v beue te clas te lt a bio tier As gene tae aes 193 10 7 When a User Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using the Configuration Function with Anoth r System i re sat Peace eem uc Ride ig ue RU E 200 10 8 When a User Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using a Sequence Program with Another System llle III 206 10 9 When a User Range Is Used and Parameters Are Set Using the Configuration Function without Another System seis zu dauer Shia git Ru AURA ERAS SIR AE 213 10 10 When a User Range Is Used and Parameter
296. xternal dimensions of a CT input module Aaa Q68CT m RUN ALM anl Ei JAB A BI 3 ME 3 HEN sg E Fp Fp l Fp Kali E JER i ds F U FE L 90 l E E 112 u Unit mm suoisuauuig jeuJe x3 y xipueddy 275 INDEX Accuracy 4 sara vea ego poh EEE SP ass 31 Adding a Module 0 00000 eee 144 Auto refresh su ouo tX eui de 149 Averaging process setting UnG24 UnG25 110 CH1 Factory default setting offset value Un G202 to CH8 Factory default setting gain value Un G217 PP Lune NOEN 122 CH1 User range setting offset value Un G218 to CH8 User range setting gain value UnG233 122 Channel change completed flag XB 86 Channel change request YB 90 CHO Average time Average number of times Moving average Time constant settings Un G1 to Un G8 Lu suerte Aar ink M Sie s dup Bade etal Me 107 CHO Digital output value Un G11 to Un G18 108 CHO Dropout value Un G162 to Un G169 121 CHO Head pointer Un G1090 to Un G1097 133 CHO Input range setting Un G150 to Un G157 119 CHO Latest pointer Un G1098 to Un G1105 134 CHO Level trigger conditi

MELSEC-Q Current Transformer Input Module User`s Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents